Sony Trimmer PCS G70 User Manual

3-863-237-11 (1)  
Video  
Communication  
System  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for  
future reference.  
PCS-G70/G70P  
© 2004 Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This manual focuses on using ISDN lines  
to conduct a videoconference, but it also  
covers non-ISDN lines. If you use ISDN  
lines, consult your Sony dealer for more  
information.  
• The ISDN service may not be available  
in some areas.  
Voor de klanten in Nederland  
Dit apparaat bevat een vast ingebouwde  
batterij die niet vervangen hoeft te worden  
tijdens de levensduur van het apparaat.  
Raadpleeg uw leverancier indien de batterij  
toch vervangen moet worden.  
De batterij mag alleen vervangen worden  
door vakbekwaam servicepersoneel.  
Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever deze in  
als klein chemisch afval (KCA).  
Lever het apparaat aan het einde van de  
levensduur in voor recycling, de batterij zal  
dan op correcte wijze verwerkt worden.  
If you dispose the unit, consult your nearest  
Sony Service Center. The built-in battery  
must be treated as a chemical waste.  
For the customers in Canada  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Setting the Video Communication  
Mode ................................30  
Features .............................................. 9  
Basic System Components ......... 11  
System Configuration ...................... 15  
— Initial Setup Wizard .....................33  
System Configuration via a  
LAN ................................ 15  
Using the Menus ...............................36  
Operation ....................................36  
Entering Characters ....................41  
ISDN ............................... 16  
System Configuration via a LAN for  
System Configuration via an ISDN  
for Multipoint  
Chapter 2: Registration and  
System Configuration via a LAN  
and ISDN for Multipoint  
System Configuration via a LAN  
for Multipoint Data  
System Configuration via an ISDN  
Video Setup Menu ......................52  
LAN Setup Menu ........................59  
System Configuration via a LAN  
and ISDN for Multipoint  
System Connection via a  
System Connection via an  
ISDN ............................... 24  
Preparing the System ....................... 25  
Inserting Batteries into the Remote  
Information Menu .......................67  
Registering a Remote Party – Phone  
Book ................................................68  
Together With the  
Communication  
Terminal .......................... 26  
Turning the System On/Off ............. 27  
Registering a New Remote  
Party .................................68  
Turning On ................................. 27  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Contents of the Phone  
Deleting the Registered Remote  
Party ................................71  
Switching the Displayed Picture  
Copying the Setting of the Phone  
Book Menu ......................71  
Switching the Picture Displayed on  
the TV Monitor ............. 102  
the Remote Party .......... 103  
Book ................................71  
Window Picture – PinP Feature .... 104  
the Dual Video Function ............... 105  
System Configuration Using 2  
Cameras and 3  
Starting a Conference by Calling a  
Monitors ....................... 105  
Turning on the Power .................74  
Function ........................ 107  
Answering a Call from a Remote  
Ending the Conference ...............89  
Adjusting the Volume ................90  
Using Still Images Stored on a  
Displaying a Still Image Stored on a  
Sending a Still Image Stored on a  
“Memory Stick” ............ 111  
– Muting Function ...........90  
Answering – Mic on Answer  
Stick” ............................ 112  
Synchronizing Audio and Video  
Images ............................................ 113  
Reducing Echo – Echo  
Sending Still Images Using the Still  
Sending a Still Image Using the  
Communication  
Selecting the Camera to be  
Adjusting the Camera Angle and  
Sending Motion Pictures Output  
from a Document Stand as  
Adjusting the Focus and  
an External Camera or Other  
Equipment as Still  
Presetting the Angle and Zoom  
Settings ............................96  
Recalling the Preset Angle and  
Zoom Setting ...................98  
Images ........................... 116  
Receiving Still Images from a Remote  
Party ............................................. 117  
Selecting the Input Picture and  
Sound .............................................100  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stick” .............................................118  
Connected Equipment for a  
Image Menu ..................118  
Setting Before Conferencing ....146  
Saving Still Images Using the  
Conference .....................146  
Saving Still Images Using the  
Monitor ...........................................151  
Submenu .......................120  
Outputting the Signal to One  
Monitor ..........................151  
or Third Monitor ............152  
during Communication — The  
Using Two Monitors–Dual Monitor  
Using Three Monitors–Triple  
Using Multiple Microphones .........129  
Whiteboard .....................................154  
Attaching the mimio Xi on the  
(CTE) .............................................131  
Whiteboard .....................................155  
Recording Audio During a  
Conference .....................................133  
Equipment to a Remote Party ........134  
Whiteboard .....................................156  
Conducting a Conference Without the  
Controlling the Remote System With  
the Tone Signal – DTMF  
Chapter 7: Encrypted  
Preparing for an Encrypted  
Videoconference via LAN ..............160  
via LAN ..........................................161  
Conference .....................................138  
Accessing the Communication  
Using a Web Browser ..............141  
Videoconference .............................163  
Connection Example Using the Data  
Solution Box ..................................143  
Using the Cascade Connection via  
LAN (Up to 10  
Connecting the CTE-600  
Communication  
Points) ............................164  
Using the ISDN Connection .....165  
Using Both LAN and ISDN ......167  
Transducer ....................145  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the LAN and ISDN cascade  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box  
On-screen Messages ...................... 200  
Specifications ................................ 211  
To check if the installation of the  
Setting for a Multipoint  
Videoconference ............................171  
Communication Setup menu ....171  
PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication  
the Multipoint Connection  
Starting a Multipoint  
Calling Remote Parties .............176  
Party ..............................180  
PCS-A300 Microphone  
What is “Broadcast Mode”? .....181  
Windows .......................183  
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit  
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit  
Mode .............................184  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit  
PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU  
PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU  
Terminal ........................185  
Ending the Multipoint  
Notes on Secondary Terminals ......187  
Activating the Chair Control ....188  
Pin Assignments on Optional Board  
Appendix  
Controls ..........................................193  
Videoconferencing Room  
PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication  
PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
Layout ............................................ 222  
Camera Range .......................... 222  
Glossary ......................................... 224  
Menu Configuration ...................... 228  
PCS-RG70 Remote  
Commander ...................196  
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit  
(Optional) ......................197  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit  
(Optional) ......................198  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Videoconference Using a  
Whiteboard  
Chapter 1:  
Installation and  
Preparation  
This chapter shows how to use a whiteboard  
with the mimio Xi* attached for a  
videoconference.  
®
* mimio is a registered trademark of Virtual  
Ink Corporation of the United States.  
minio Xi is a trademark of Virtual Ink  
Corporation of the United States.  
Chapter 7: Encrypted  
Videoconference via LAN  
Using This Manual  
This chapter shows how to conduct a  
videoconference using an encrypted video  
and audio data, and encrypted data from a  
computer connected to the Data Solution  
Box.  
The chapters cover the following contents;  
please read the chapters that may be required  
for your type of videoconference.  
Chapter 8: Multipoint  
Videoconference  
Chapter 1: Installation and  
Preparation  
This chapter shows you how to use the  
Video Communication System to hold a  
multipoint videoconference.  
You need to install MCU software in this  
System for a multipoint videoconference.  
This chapter guides you through the system  
configuration and information required to  
use your Video Communication System for  
the first time. It shows you how to install and  
connect your Video Communication  
System, to turn the system on/off and how to  
access basic on-screen menus.  
Appendix  
The appendix contains descriptions of the  
controls and connectors on the components  
of the Video Communication System,  
message and troubleshooting lists,  
specifications, and a glossary.  
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for  
System Administrator  
This chapter describes how to register and  
set up all the necessary items for system  
administrators, using the on-screen menus.  
Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference  
This chapter guides you through the basic  
operations and settings to conduct a  
videoconference. You will learn how to  
conduct a conference from start to finish. It  
is recommended that this chapter be read by  
participants in the videoconference.  
Chapter 4: Videoconference With  
Optional Equipment  
This chapter shows advanced  
videoconferencing using the optional  
equipment.  
Chapter 5: Data Conference  
This chapter shows you how to use the data  
from a computer for the conference by using  
the optional Data Solution Box.  
8
Using This Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
G.728, G723.1, and G.711 audio  
compression formats.  
Features  
QoS (Quality of Service) function  
for optimization of bandwidth and  
traffic packet through network  
This system includes the “Packet Resend  
Request”, “Adaptive Rate Control”, and  
“Forward Error Control” functions.  
Depending on the network status, these  
functions are used in Hybrid to guarantee  
consistent, high-quality communications.  
The PCS-G70/G70P Video Communication  
System is a videoconferencing system that  
provides natural, face-to-face  
communications with a remote party by  
transmitting and receiving images and sound  
via LAN (Local Area Network) or ISDN  
(Integrated Services Digital Network)  
connections.  
Supports ITU-T international  
videoconferencing standard  
The Video Communication System  
complies with ITU-T Recommendations  
defined by WTSC for easy connection with  
remote parties overseas.  
Supports the transmission of two  
different video signals (dual video  
function)  
Using two cameras, you can display the  
speaker and the entire conference room  
simultaneously, strengthening the sense of  
reality of the videoconference.  
ITU: International Telecommunication  
Union  
WTSC: World Telecommunications  
Standardization Committee  
Easy setup and operation  
Help is displayed on the monitor when you  
need guidance. The menus used by the  
system administrator or those by conference  
participants are displayed separately.  
Supports data conferences  
Use of the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data  
Solution Box allows the data from a personal  
computer to be incorporated in the  
presentation or to be shown on the projector.  
Supports multipoint conference  
Installing the optional PCSA-M3G70 H.323  
MCU software (for LAN) or the  
PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software (for  
ISDN) allows conduct of a multipoint  
conference.  
The multipoint conference via LAN and  
ISDN connections mixed is also available if  
both the PCSA-M3G70 H.323 and  
PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software are  
installed in a main terminal.  
High transmission speeds and  
high-quality picture capability  
The Video Communication System accepts  
a LAN bandwidth of up to 4 Mbps. It also  
allows you to connect to as many as three  
ISDN lines and use 6B channels with the  
optional PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit, and as  
many as six ISDN lines and use 12B  
channels with the optional PCSA-B768S  
ISDN Unit. (When you use PRI, you can  
connect to one line and use 23B channels  
(T1) or 30B channels (E1).)  
Equipped with a Memory Stick slot  
The Communication Terminal is equipped  
with a Memory Stick slot, allowing the use  
of still images recorded with a digital still  
camera and stored in the “Memory Stick”.  
Wide range of video/audio  
compression format selectable  
The Video Communication System supports  
H.264, H.263 4CIF, H.263, H.261, MPEG4,  
interlaced SIF (H.264/H.263) video  
compression formats. It also supports  
MPEG4 AAC, G.722.1, G.722, G.729,  
Features 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Triple monitor system  
You can connect three monitors to the  
Communication Terminal, which allows  
you, for example, to display video from the  
remote party, video from your terminal, and  
video from a computer or whiteboard  
simultaneously.  
Supports an encrypted  
videoconference (only for LAN  
connection)  
When you connect to other terminals via  
LAN, you can start a videoconference only  
with the terminals that enter the preset  
password. This feature allows you to hold a  
strictly confidential videoconference.  
An encrypted conference among multiple  
points or with cascade connection is enabled  
if all the terminals are connected via LAN.  
10 Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Components  
The PCS-G70/G70P Video Communication System is composed of basic  
system components for a basic videoconference, and optional equipment for  
an enhanced videoconference.  
Basic System Components  
The PCS-G70/G70P Video Communication System is the basic system of the  
PCS-G70/G70P Videoconferencing System. It contains the following components:  
Unit  
Description  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
Communication Terminal  
Contains the video codec, audio codec, echo  
canceler, network interfaces and system controller.  
PCSA-CG70/CG70P  
Camera Unit  
Camera to shoot videoconference.  
PCS-RG70 Remote  
Commander  
Used to operate the Communication Terminal and  
Camera Unit.  
PCS-AC19V6 AC adaptor  
Supplies power to the Communication Terminal.  
Video Converter Cable  
1-757-517-11  
Used to send video output from a pin terminal to an  
S-video terminal.  
System Components 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Optional Equipment  
TV monitor  
A TV or projector, etc. is required to monitor the images for videoconferencing system.  
Unit  
Description  
TV, Projector, etc.  
Used as a monitor and speakers.  
Optional equipment especially designed for use with the PCS-G70/G70P  
The following optional devices are used to enhance your videoconference.  
Unit  
Description  
PCSA-STMG70 Stand  
This stand can be used to place the Communication  
Terminal on end.  
PCSA-STCG70 Camera Stand Stand for the Camera Unit.  
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit  
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit  
Used to connect to an ISDN line. Up to three ISDN  
lines; 6B channels usable.  
Used to connect to an ISDN line. Up to six ISDN  
lines; 12B channels usable.  
Used to connect to an ISDN line through the PRI line  
interface.  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box Use of this device allows easy connection with a  
computer or projector for a data conference.  
12 System Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unit  
Description  
PCS-A1 Microphone  
Omni-directional microphone that picks up sound  
relatively from all directions, allowing participants to  
speak from any location. It is recommended to use in  
a quiet situation.  
PCS-A300 Microphone  
Unidirectional microphone. It is recommended when  
you want to pick up the voice of a speaker directed  
toward the microphone.  
PCS-DS150/DS150P  
Document Stand  
Camera for documents.  
Allows transmission of pictures to the  
Communication Terminal by infrared signals without  
connecting a cable.  
CTE-600 Communication  
Transducer  
Integrated microphone/speaker system suitable for  
remote communication. The uni-directional  
microphones pick up clear voice with minimum  
background noise.  
Moreover, the omni-directional speaker outputs  
sound equally in all directions.  
PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU  
Software  
Allows use for a multipoint videoconference over  
LAN connection.  
PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU  
Software  
Allows use for a multipoint videoconference over  
ISDN connection.  
Cables  
Use the following cables to connect devices in this system.  
PCS-G70/G70P Video Communication System  
Cable  
Part No.  
Number  
Camera cable (0.25 m (0.8 ft))  
S-video cable (1.5 m (4.9 ft))  
Audio cable (1 m (3.3 ft))  
1-827-376-11  
1-776-078-42  
1-765-258-31  
1
1
1
System Components 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera cable  
S-video cable  
Audio cable  
14 System Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
The PCS-G70/G70P Video Communication System has various system  
configuration capabilities using the basic components and optional equipment.  
This section describes eight typical examples.  
System Configuration via a LAN  
This allows you:  
• To hold a point-to-point videoconference over LAN.  
• To show still images stored on a “Memory Stick”.  
System configuration  
1 PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication  
Terminal  
2 PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
3 PCS-RG70 Remote Commander  
4 TV monitor (not supplied)  
System Configuration 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Configuration via an ISDN  
Connection to ISDN is required to use the PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S, or  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit especially designed for use with this system.  
This allows you:  
• To hold a point-to-point videoconference over ISDN.  
• To show still images stored on a “Memory Stick”.  
• To hold a videoconference with high speeds and highest quality image  
transmission by connecting up to three ISDN lines (when using the PCSA-  
B384S), by connecting up to six ISDN lines (when using the PCSA-B768S)  
or by connecting one ISDN line (when using the PCSA-PRI).  
System configuration  
1 PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication  
Terminal  
2 PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
3 PCS-RG70 Remote Commander  
*
4 TV monitor (not supplied)  
5 PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S or PCSA-  
PRI ISDN Unit (not supplied)  
*
*
The illustration shows an example using  
the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.  
About the number of ISDN lines and B (bearer) channel  
Up to three ISDN lines (6B channels) with the PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit, up to  
six ISDN lines (12B channels) with the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit, or one ISDN  
line (23B channels (T1), 30B channels (E1)) with the PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit  
can be connected to one PCS-PG70/PG70P. The more channels you use for a  
single communication, the faster speeds and higher-quality picture you can  
obtain for your network communication.  
16 System Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration via a LAN for Multipoint Conference  
You need to install the optional PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software.  
This allows you:  
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to ten sites over LAN.  
• To show still images stored on a “Memory Stick”.  
• To show the still images on the second TV monitor or projector.  
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to two external  
microphones.  
System configuration  
1 PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication Terminal  
2 PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
3 PCS-RG70 Remote Commander  
4 TV monitor (not supplied)  
5 PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (not supplied)  
System Configuration 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration via an ISDN for Multipoint Conference  
You need to connect the optional PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S, or PCSA-PRI  
ISDN Unit especially designed for use with this system and to install the  
optional PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software.  
This allows you:  
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to six sites over ISDN.  
• To show still images stored on a “Memory Stick”.  
• To show the still images on the second TV monitor or projector.  
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to two external  
microphones.  
System configuration  
1 PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication Terminal  
2 PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
3 PCS-RG70 Remote Commander  
4 TV monitor (not supplied)  
*
5 PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software (not supplied)  
6 PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S or PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit  
(not supplied)  
The illustration shows an  
example using the PCSA-B768S  
ISDN Unit.  
18 System Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration via a LAN and ISDN for Multipoint  
Conference  
Installing the optional PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (for LAN) and  
PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software (for ISDN) enables conduct of a  
multipoint conference via a LAN and ISDN mixed.  
Two Communication Terminals in which MCU software is installed must be  
connected via a LAN.  
This allows you:  
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to ten sites over LAN and  
ISDN.  
• To show still images stored on a “Memory Stick”.  
• To show the still images on the second TV monitor or projector.  
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to two external  
microphones.  
System configuration  
*
Be sure to connect two  
Communication Terminals,  
with the MCU software  
installed, via a LAN.  
1 PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication Terminal  
2 PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
3 PCS-RG70 Remote Commander  
4 TV monitor (not supplied)  
5 PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (not supplied)  
6 PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software (not supplied)  
7 PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S or PCSA-PRI ISDN  
Unit (not supplied)  
*
The illustration shows an  
example using the  
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.  
System Configuration 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration via a LAN for Multipoint Data Conference  
You need to connect the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box especially  
designed to use with this system and to install the optional PCSA-M3G70  
H.323 MCU software.  
This allows you:  
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to ten sites over LAN.  
• To show still images stored on a “Memory Stick”.  
• To use the data from a computer or external equipment.  
• To show the data from a computer or still images on the second TV monitor  
or projector.  
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to five external  
microphones connected to the Data Solution Box.  
System configuration  
1 PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication Terminal  
2 PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
3 PCS-RG70 Remote Commander  
4 TV monitor (not supplied)  
5 PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (not supplied)  
6 PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box (not supplied)  
7 PCS-A1 Microphone (not supplied)  
20 System Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration via an ISDN for Multipoint Data Conference  
You need to connect the optional PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S, or PCSA-PRI  
ISDN Unit and the PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box especially designed for  
use with this System and to install the optional PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU  
software.  
This allows you:  
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to six sites over ISDN.  
• To show still images stored on a “Memory Stick”.  
• To use the data from a computer or an external equipment.  
• To show the data from a computer or still images on the second TV monitor  
or projector.  
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to five external  
microphones connected to the Data Solution Box.  
System configuration  
*
1 PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication Terminal  
2 PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
3 PCS-RG70 Remote Commander  
The illustration shows an  
example using the PCSA-B768S  
ISDN Unit.  
4 TV monitor (not supplied)  
5 PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software (not supplied)  
6 PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S or PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit (not supplied)  
7 PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box (not supplied)  
8 PCS-A1 Microphone (not supplied)  
System Configuration 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration via a LAN and ISDN for Multipoint Data  
Conference  
Installing the optional PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software, the PCS-M0G70  
H.320 MCU software, and using the optional Data Solution Box PCS-DSB1S  
and ISDN Units PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S, or PCSA-PRI enables you to  
conduct multipoint mixed LAN and ISDN line multipoint data conferences.  
Two Communication Terminals where the MCU software is installed must be  
connected via a LAN in this configuration.  
This allows you:  
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to six sites over ISDN.  
• To show still images stored on a “Memory Stick”.  
• To use data from a computer or other such peripheral device in the  
videoconference.  
• To show still images or computer data on the second monitor or projector  
used as the display device.  
• To connect up to five external microphones to the Data Solution Box,  
allowing you to hear several participants.  
System configuration  
*
*
*
1 PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication Terminal  
2 PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
3 PCS-RG70 Remote Commander  
Be sure to connect two  
Communication Terminals, with  
the MCU software installed, via  
a LAN.  
4 TV monitor (not supplied)  
5 PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (not supplied)  
6 PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box (not supplied)  
7 PCS-A1 Microphone (not supplied)  
8 PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software (not supplied)  
9 PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S or PCSA-PRI ISDN  
Unit (not supplied)  
The illustration shows an  
example using the PCSA-B768S  
ISDN Unit.  
22 System Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Connections  
This section describes the typical system connections.  
Notes  
• Be sure to turn off all the equipment before making any connections.  
• Do not connect/disconnect the camera cable with the power on. Doing so may damage the  
Camera Unit or Communication Terminal.  
• For safety, do not connect the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector to a network that  
applies an excess voltage via the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector.  
System Connection via a LAN  
PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera Unit  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
to TERMINAL  
Camera cable*  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
Communication  
Terminal  
to MAIN CAMERA  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
AIN  
CAMRA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
AUX  
ONITOR  
VIDEUT  
to 100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
to  
to  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
MONITOR 1  
PCS-AC19V6  
AC adaptor  
Power cord*  
to DC19.5V  
Audio cable*  
to a wall outlet  
S-video cable*  
UTP cable (category 5, straight)**  
TV monitor**  
to LAN  
to  
S-video  
input  
* supplied  
** not supplied  
to a wall outlet  
to audio input  
Notes  
• If you are only using one camera, be sure to connect it to the MAIN CAMERA connector.  
• The AUDIO OUT (MIXED) jack is used to make an audio recording of a conference.  
This is not used during regular conferences.  
System Connections 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Connection via an ISDN  
Notes  
• Do not connect/disconnect the camera cable or the interface cable with the power on.  
Doing so may damage the Camera Unit, Communication Terminal or ISDN Unit.  
• Used with an ISDN Unit for the first time, the Communication Terminal may  
automatically upgrade the software of the ISDN Unit. While the upgrading message  
is displayed on the monitor screen, be sure not to turn off the Communication  
Terminal. Doing so may cause malfunction of the system.  
**  
ISDN Unit  
PCSA-CG70/CG70P  
Camera Unit  
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit**  
to ISDN 1-3  
PCSA-B768S  
ISDN Unit**  
to TERMINAL  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
to ISDN 1-6  
to TERMINAL  
PSCA-PRI  
ISDN Unit**  
Interface cable (supplied  
with ISDN UNIT)  
Camera cable*  
to ISDN PRI  
to ISDN  
UNIT  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
to MAIN  
CAMERA  
Communication  
Terminal  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMRA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
ISDN modular cable**  
AUX IN  
AUX
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
A
MONITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
to VIDEO OUT  
MONITOR 1  
to  
AUDIO  
OUT  
PCS-AC19V6  
AC adaptor  
Power cord*  
to a wall outlet  
to DC19.5V  
Audio cable*  
S-video  
cable*  
TV monitor**  
to  
S-video  
input  
* supplied  
** not supplied  
to audio input  
to a wall outlet  
Notes  
• If you are only using one camera, be sure to connect it to the MAIN CAMERA connector.  
• The AUDIO OUT (MIXED) jack is used to make an audio recording of a conference.  
This is not used during regular conferences.  
24 System Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparing the System  
Inserting Batteries into the Remote Commander  
Most of the operations with the Video Communication System can be  
controlled with the supplied Remote Commander.  
1 Remove the battery compartment cover.  
2 Insert two size AAA (R03) batteries (supplied) with correct polarities into  
the battery compartment.  
Note  
Be sure to insert the batteries E side first. Inserting them forcibly e side first may  
damage the insulated film covering the batteries and cause a short circuit.  
3 Replace the cover.  
Battery life  
When the Remote Commander does not function properly, replace both the  
batteries with new ones.  
Notes on batteries  
To avoid damage from possible battery leakage or corrosion, observe the  
following:  
• Make sure to insert the batteries with the polarities in the correct direction.  
• Do not mix old and new batteries, or different types of batteries.  
• Do not attempt to charge the batteries.  
• If you do not intend to use the Remote Commander for a long period of time,  
remove the batteries.  
• If battery leakage occurs, clean the battery compartment and replace all the  
batteries with new ones.  
Preparing the System 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On/Off the TV Monitor Together With the Communication  
Terminal  
If you use a Sony TV, insert the IR repeater under the remote sensor of the TV.  
Once you set the IR repeater, the TV will turn on or go to standby together with  
the Communication Terminal when you press the @/1 button on the supplied  
Remote Commander.  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
TV monitor  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
1
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
AUX  
MONITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
to IR OUT  
Remote sensor  
IR repeater (supplied)  
Note  
If the TV monitor is not turned on by pressing the @/1 button on the Remote  
Commander, change the “IR Repeater Mode” setting in the General Setup menu.  
For details on the “IR Repeater Mode” setting, see “General Setup Menu” on  
page 53.  
26 Preparing the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning the System On/Off  
This section describes how to turn on or off the Communication Terminal.  
Turning On  
1 Turn on the TV monitor.  
If the IR repeater is installed in the TV monitor, set the TV monitor to standby  
mode. The TV monitor will turn on simultaneously when the Communication  
Terminal is turned on.  
2 Turn on the power of any other equipment to be used for the  
videoconference.  
3 Open the front panel of the Communication Terminal, and then slide the  
power switch on the right to the on position (@).  
POWER indicators  
(Light green.)  
Power switch  
The Communication Terminal turns on after a while. Three indicators on the  
front of the Communication Terminal and the POWER indicator on the camera  
light, then only the POWER indicators on both units remain on in green. The  
launcher menu will appear on the monitor screen and the picture shot by the  
local camera will also appear in the launcher menu.  
Turning the System On/Off 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Launcher menu  
Phone Book  
Detail Dial  
History  
Tokyo  
New York  
Menu  
IP:  
012.345.678.678  
Information  
Dial  
ISDN: 012345678956789  
Paris  
AUTO  
Enter the remote party number.  
Notes  
• After the power is turned on, the camera moves automatically for trial operation. Be  
careful not to catch your finger.  
• If you use force to prevent the camera moving, it may not resume moving and not  
output a signal to the Communication Terminal. In this case, turn off the terminal, and  
• When you turn on the power of the Communication Terminal for the first time after  
installation, the setup wizard will appear after the self-diagnosis is completed. Set up  
your system following the wizard.  
For setups using the wizard, see “Setting Up the System for the First Time  
— Initial Setup Wizard” on page 33.  
• Used with an optional device especially designed for use with this system, such as the  
Data Solution Box or ISDN Unit, for the first time, the Communication Terminal may  
automatically upgrade the software of the connected device. While the upgrading  
message is displayed on the monitor screen, be sure not to turn off the Communication  
Terminal. Doing so may cause malfunction of the system. System malfunction may  
also occur when a system power-off has been caused by an accidental problem such  
as a power interruption during upgrading. If connection of the Data Solution Box or  
ISDN Unit to the Communication Terminal is not re-established even after the system  
power is recovered, consult a Sony dealer.  
28 Turning the System On/Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standby Mode Function  
To save power, the Communication Terminal will enter standby mode if you  
do not operate it for a specified period of time.  
When the Communication Terminal is in standby mode, the POWER indicator  
lights in orange. Once the Communication Terminal receives a call, the  
standby mode is automatically released.  
To release the standby mode  
Press the @/1 button on the Remote Commander.  
To specify the standby time  
Specify the time that you want the system to remain on before entering into  
standby mode (1 to 99 minutes) by selecting “Device Setup” on the General  
Setup menu, and then setting “Standby Time”. If you do not want the system  
to enter the standby mode, set “Standby Mode” to “Off”.  
For the “Standby Time” and “Standby Mode” settings, see “General Setup  
Menu” on page 53.  
Notes  
• The POWER indicator on the camera goes off when the system enters standby mode.  
• If you use a Sony TV monitor with the IR repeater installed under the remote sensor,  
the TV monitor will enter standby mode together with the Communication Terminal.  
Turning the System On/Off 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Video Communication System to Standby Mode  
You can turn on the Video Communication System with the @/1 button on the  
Remote Commander if it is in standby mode.  
1 Display the launcher menu on the monitor screen, then press the @/1 button  
on the Remote Commander.  
The message “Power off?” appears on the monitor screen.  
2 Press the B or b button on the Remote Commander to select OK, and press  
the PUSH ENTER button.  
You may press the @/1 button on the Remote Commander.  
POWER indicator (Not lit.)  
POWER indicator (Lights orange.)  
@/1 button  
B/b buttons and PUSH ENTER  
button  
The Video Communication System enters standby mode and the POWER  
indicator on the Communication Terminal lights in orange. The POWER  
indicator on the camera goes out.  
If the IR repeater is installed in a Sony TV monitor, it will go into standby  
together with the Video Communication System.  
Note  
When the Communication Terminal and the Camera are separately installed, point the  
Remote Commander to the Camera for operations.  
To cancel setting the system to standby  
Select “Cancel” with the B or b button on the Remote Commander, then press  
the PUSH ENTER button in step 2 above.  
30 Turning the System On/Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning Off  
1 Open the front panel of the Communication Terminal, and then slide the  
power switch on the right to the off position ({).  
2 Turn off the power of other equipment used for the videoconference.  
Note  
Set the power switch on the Communication Terminal off when the system will not be  
used for an extended period. While the power switch is off, you cannot receive a call  
from a remote party.  
Adjusting the Volume on the TV Monitor  
Before adjusting the volume on the TV monitor, set the volume on the  
Communication Terminal to the appropriate position.  
1 Press the VOLUME +/– buttons on the Remote Commander to set the  
volume level on the adjustment bar displayed on the screen to the middle  
position.  
2 Adjust the volume on the TV monitor so that you can properly hear a  
remote party speaking.  
To adjust the picture on the TV monitor  
Use the controls on the TV monitor to adjust the picture, hue, contrast,  
brightness or sharpness.  
For details on picture adjustments, refer to the Operating Instructions of the  
TV.  
Note  
Do not activate the TV's surround sound feature as it may cause the echo canceller of  
the Communication Terminal not to function properly and make strange sounds.  
Turning the System On/Off 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Displaying Help  
Pressing the HELP button on the Remote Commander displays a balloon help  
or a help screen to guide most operations on the monitor screen.  
Note  
You can hide the balloon help used for entering characters.  
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to show the menu, and set  
“Character Input Help” under “Menu Screens” of the General Setup menu to “Off”. (See  
page 53.)  
Displaying the Versions and Options  
You can check the version of the Communication Terminal, versions of the  
connected optional equipment for exclusive use with this system, and the  
options installed in the terminal by displaying the Status menu on the monitor  
screen.  
For details on the Status menu, see “Information Menu” on page 67.  
32 Turning the System On/Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note  
Setting Up the  
System for the First  
Time — Initial Setup  
Wizard  
When you turn on the Communication  
Terminal for the first time after installation  
and the self-diagnosis is completed, the  
setup wizard appears on the monitor screen.  
Register your local system data with the  
setup wizard using the Remote Commander.  
If you select a monitor from “Monitor  
Out”, other monitors than that you selected  
display no menus.  
Monitor Setup Wizard  
Monitors  
1
VIDEO1  
Main  
VIDEO2  
RGB OUT  
RGB OUT(DSB)  
Connection  
Sub  
Sub  
Monitor  
Previous  
Next  
Cancel  
Notes  
• You can change the settings made with the  
setup wizard later using the Setup menus.  
• The setup wizard will also be displayed when  
you install the PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S,  
or PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit to your system  
later. Perform the setup again.  
Monitors  
Select the number of monitors  
connected to the system.  
1: One monitor connected.  
2: Two monitors connected.  
3: Three monitors connected.  
1 Select the language used for the on-  
screen menus and messages in the  
Language Setup Wizard.  
Connection  
Selects the output connector to which  
the device to be used is connected.  
VIDEO 1: Selects the device connected  
to the VIDEO 1 connector.  
VIDEO 2: Selects the device connected  
to the VIDEO 2 connector.  
RGB OUT: Selects the device  
connected to the RGB OUT  
connector as the main monitor.  
RGB OUT (DSB): Selects the device  
connected to the RGB OUT  
connector on the Data Solution Box.  
Monitor  
Language: Select one of the following  
languages; English, French, German,  
Japanese, Spanish, Italian, Simplified  
Chinese, or Portuguese.  
Language Setup Wizard  
Language  
English  
Allows you to define the monitor  
connected to the corresponding  
connector as the main monitor or the sub  
monitor.  
Next  
Cancel  
monitor.  
Sub: Defines the monitor as the sub  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select “Next”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The Monitor Setup Wizard appears.  
monitor.  
For details, see “Displaying the Picture  
on a Projector or Monitor” on page 151.  
3 Select a monitor from which signals  
are output.  
Setting Up the System for the First Time — Initial Setup Wizard 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Local Number: Enter the telephone  
number.  
4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select “Next”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The ISDN Setup Wizard appears when  
the PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S or  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit is connected.  
When the ISDN Unit is not connected,  
the LAN Setup Wizard is displayed.  
Proceed to step 11.  
Notes  
• When you select a blank text box and  
press the PUSH ENTER button on the  
Remote Commander, the content in the  
text box immediately above will be  
copied to the selected text box.  
• When you use the PCSA-B384S ISDN  
unit and connect 2 or 3 ISDN lines,  
enter the telephone numbers in the B1  
to C2 text boxes in addition to the A1  
and A2 boxes.  
5 Set the following items on the ISDN  
line.  
ISDN Setup Wizard  
• When you use the PCSA-B768S and  
connect 2 to 6 ISDN lines, enter the  
telephone numbers in the B1 to F2 text  
boxes in addition to the A1 and A2  
boxes. To open the menu with D1 to  
F2 text boxes, select “Next”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
• When you use the PCSA-PRI, Ch1 to  
Ch23 (T1), or Ch1 to Ch30 (E1) are  
displayed. Enter the telephone  
Country/Region  
Protocol  
USA  
National ISDN  
Previous  
Next  
Cancel  
Country/Region: Select your country  
or region.  
Protocol: Select the protocol of the  
ISDN line you are using.  
numbers according to the number of  
channels you will use.  
ISDN Setup Wizard  
6 Use the V, v, B or b button to select  
“Next”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
Area Code  
Local Number  
Ch1  
Ch2  
Ch3  
Ch4  
Ch5  
Ch6  
7 Enter the telephone number of the  
ISDN used by the system.  
When you use one ISDN line, enter the  
same number both in the A1 and A2 text  
boxes (except for the USA and Canada).  
Previous  
Next  
Cancel  
When you select Auto SPID (only  
for customers in the USA and  
Canada)  
You can automatically set up the Area  
Code and Local Number on this page,  
and SPID items in the SPID menu.  
ISDN Setup Wizard  
Area Code  
Local Number  
A1  
A2  
B1  
B2  
C1  
C2  
8 Use the V, v, B or b button to select  
“Next”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
Previous  
Next  
Cancel  
Area Code: Enter the area code. Do not  
enter the first “0” number.  
34 Setting Up the System for the First Time — Initial Setup Wizard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 Enter the sub-addresses.  
11 Set the following items on the LAN.  
Only numbers are available for a sub-  
address.  
LAN Setup Wizard  
When you use one ISDN line, enter the  
same number both in the A1 and A2 text  
boxes (except for the USA and Canada).  
DHCP Mode  
Off  
Host Name  
IP Address  
Network Mask  
Gateway Address  
DNS Address  
ISDN Setup Wizard  
Sub Address  
A1:  
A2:  
B1:  
B2:  
C1:  
C2:  
Previous  
Next  
Cancel  
DHCP Mode  
Sets the DHCP (Dynamic Host  
Configuration Protocol).  
Previous  
Next  
Cancel  
Auto: Automatically assigns your IP  
address, network mask, gateway  
address and DNS address.  
Off: Deactivates DHCP. In this case set  
your IP address, network mask,  
gateway address and DNS address  
manually.  
Host Name  
Enter your host name.  
IP Address  
Enter your IP address.  
Network Mask  
Enter your network mask.  
Gateway Address  
Enter your default gateway address.  
DNS Address  
Enter your DNS (Domain Name  
System) server address.  
Note  
When you use the PCSA-B384S ISDN  
unit and connect 2 or 3 ISDN lines, enter  
the sub-addresses in the B1 to C2 text  
boxes in addition to the A1 and A2 boxes.  
When you use the PCSA-B768S and  
connect 2 to 6 ISDN lines, enter the sub-  
addresses in the B1 to F2 text boxes in  
addition to the A1 and A2 boxes. To open  
the menu with these text boxes, select  
“Next”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
When you use the PCSA-PRI, Ch1 to Ch23  
(T1), or Ch1 to Ch30 (E1) are displayed.  
Enter the telephone numbers according to  
the number of channels you will use.  
Note  
10 Use the V, v, B or b button to select  
“Next”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
When you set “DHCP Mode” to “Auto”,  
the assigned IP address is shown in the  
launcher menu (page 75) or Information  
menu (page 67).  
If you do not know how to set up the LAN  
configuration, contact your network  
administrator.  
The message window for confirmation  
appears.  
Setting Up the System for the First Time — Initial Setup Wizard 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Use the V, v, B or b button to select  
“Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
Using the Menus  
The Video Communication System uses the  
on-screen menus to make various adjustments  
and settings. This section describes how to  
adjust or set the items in the menus and gives  
a brief introduction of the menus.  
Save  
Previous  
Cancel  
The settings are saved.  
For the menu configuration, see page 228.  
To cancel the setting  
Press the V, v, B or b button to select  
“Cancel”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
Operation  
The basic operation through the menu is  
explained by taking the Setup menu.  
To go back to the previous wizard  
Press the V, v, B or b button to select  
“Previous”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
1 Press the MENU button on the  
Remote Commander, or press the V,  
v, B or b button to select “Menu” and  
press the PUSH ENTER button in the  
launcher menu.  
The Setup menu appears.  
Setup  
Press and hold the [MENU] button to show more  
detailed setup menus.  
2 Press and hold the MENU button.  
The Setup menu for the administrator  
appears.  
Setup  
Dial  
Answer  
Status  
Communication  
Audio  
Video  
General  
LAN  
Administrator  
ISDN  
Information  
36 Using the Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select the  
menu you want to set, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
6 Press the V or v button to select the  
item you want to set or adjust, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The setting items are displayed.  
The selected setup menu appears.  
General  
Device Setup  
General  
Page:  
1/2  
Device Setup  
Whiteboard  
Clock Set  
Terminal Name  
Standby Mode  
Menu Screens  
On  
Standby Time  
Last Number Registration  
Control by Far End  
On  
Off  
Save  
Cancel  
Save  
Cancel  
7 Press the V or v button to select the  
setting item you want, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select the  
menu you want to set, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
8 Press the v button to select “Save”,  
The selected setup menu appears.  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
General  
Setup  
Device Setup  
Page:  
1/2  
Clock Set  
Terminal Name  
Standby Mode  
Press and hold the [MENU] button to show more  
detailed setup menus.  
On  
Standby Time  
Last Number Registration  
Control by Far End  
On  
On  
Save  
Cancel  
The selected setting is saved.  
5 Press the b button, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
To return to the previous menu  
Press the RETURN button on the Remote  
Commander.  
The top item is selected.  
General  
Device Setup  
Page:  
1/2  
Clock Set  
Terminal Name  
Standby Mode  
On  
Standby Time  
Last Number Registration  
Control by Far End  
On  
On  
Save  
Cancel  
Using the Menus 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Configuration  
The system menus are configured as outlined below.  
For details about menu configuration, see “Menu Configuration” on page 228.  
Launcher menu  
Phone Book/Private Phone Book  
Phone Book  
Phone Book  
Detail Dial  
History  
0-9  
A-1  
Tokyo  
AUTO  
Jane  
J-S  
T-Z  
Mary  
New York  
Menu  
Recent  
IP:  
ISDN:  
012.345.678.678  
012345678956789  
Information  
Dial  
New Entry  
Cancel  
Paris  
AUTO  
Enter the remote party number.  
Detail Dial  
Detail Dial  
Line I/F  
IP  
IP  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Dial  
Save  
Cancel  
History  
Still Image menu  
History  
Tokyo  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
New York  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
Paris  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
NAKAHATA  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
Cancel  
Menu  
Camera menu  
Setup  
Press and hold the [MENU]button to show more detailed  
setup menus.  
Memory Stick menu  
Information  
Memory Stick  
Phone Book  
JPEG  
Information  
PORT  
l Dial  
ry  
Tokyo  
IP: 012.345.678.912  
Video: Object  
ISDN: 012345678912  
Audio: MIC(INT)+AUX  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
New York  
Save  
OK  
ISDN: 012345678956789  
ation  
Dial  
Memory Stick Format  
Paris  
AUTO  
Setup menu  
Selecting the icons shown on the left side of the  
launcher menu displays each menu.  
Setup  
Dial  
Answer  
Communication  
Audio  
Status  
Video  
Icon  
Displayed menu  
General  
LAN  
Administrator  
ISDN  
Information  
Returns to the previous menu.  
Still Image menu  
Camera menu  
Memory Stick menu  
Setup menu  
38 Using the Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Launcher menu  
The Detail Dial is used to call a remote party  
who is not registered in the Phone Book. The  
Detail Dial appears when you select “Detail  
Dial” on the launcher menu. The menu also  
appears when you press the CONNECT/  
Phone Book  
Detail Dial  
History  
Tokyo  
DISCONNECT (  
/
) button on the  
New York  
Menu  
Remote Commander.  
IP:  
ISDN:  
012.345.678.678  
012345678956789  
Information  
Dial  
For details on the Detail Dial, see pages 79  
to 83.  
Paris  
AUTO  
Enter the remote party number.  
History  
The launcher menu is displayed when the  
Video Communication System is turned on  
or while not connected to a remote party.  
History  
Tokyo  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
New York  
For details on the launcher menu, see page  
75.  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
Paris  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
Phone Book  
Osaka  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
Cancel  
Phone Book  
This menu is used to control the  
0-9  
A-1  
videoconference history information. The  
menu appears when you select “History” on  
the launcher menu.  
AUTO  
Jane  
J-S  
T-Z  
Mary  
Recent  
New Entry  
Cancel  
For details on the History, see page 84.  
Setup menu  
Setup  
The Phone Book is used to register a remote  
party, or to call a registered remote party.  
The Phone Book appears when you select  
“Phone Book” on the launcher menu.  
Press and hold the [MENU] button to show more  
detailed setup menus.  
For details on the Phone Book, see pages 68  
to 71 and 84 to 86.  
Detail Dial  
The menu appears when you select “Menu”  
on the launcher menu. The menu also  
appears when you press the MENU button  
on the Remote Commander.  
Detail Dial  
Line I/F  
IP  
IP  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Dial  
Save  
Cancel  
Using the Menus 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information  
Camera menu  
Phone Book  
il Dial  
ory  
Information  
PORT  
Tokyo  
IP: 012.345.678.912  
Video: Object  
ISDN: 012345678912  
Audio: MIC(INT)+AUX  
New York  
u  
OK  
ISDN:  
012345678956789  
fmation  
Dial  
Paris  
AUTO  
This menu is used to display the current  
setting status of the Communication  
Terminal. The menu appears when you  
select “Information” on the launcher menu.  
The Camera menu is used to adjust the  
camera angle or to zoom the displayed  
image. The menu appears when you select  
“Menu” on the Launcher menu, and then  
For details on the Information, see pages 76  
to 77.  
select  
when it appears.  
For details on the Camera menu, see page  
94 to 99.  
Still Image menu  
Setup menu (for the administrator)  
Setup  
Dial  
Answer  
Status  
Communication  
Audio  
Video  
General  
LAN  
Administrator  
ISDN  
Information  
images. The menu appears when you select  
“Menu” on the launcher menu, and then  
select  
when it appears.  
The Setup menu for the administrator is used  
to set various detailed items on the system.  
The menu can be displayed by holding down  
the MENU button on the Remote  
Commander.  
For details on the Still Image menu, see  
pages 113 to 120.  
Note  
You can also display the Setup menu for the  
administrator by pressing the numeric button  
9 on the Remote Commander twice while  
the Setup menu (Initial Setup) or the screen  
in communication is displayed.  
For details on the Setup menu (for the  
administrator), see pages 43 to 67.  
40 Using the Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Stick menu  
Entering Characters  
Memory Stick  
This section explains how to enter the  
letters, numbers or symbols on the text box  
in the menu using the Remote Commander.  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
Save  
Memory Stick Format  
DISPLAY (CLEAR)  
button  
FAR/NEAR  
(ALPHA/NUM)  
button  
The Memory Stick menu is used to use  
“Memory Sticks”. The menu is not available  
if there is no “Memory Stick” inserted in the  
appears when you select “Menu” on the  
VIDEO INPUT  
SELECT(SYMBOL)  
button  
launcher menu, and then select  
appears.  
when it  
PinP (BACK  
SPACE) button  
For details on the Memory Stick menu, see  
pages 108 to 112 and pages 118 to 120.  
Number buttons  
(dot) button  
PCS-RG70  
To enter letters or numbers  
1 Press the FAR/NEAR (ALPHA/  
NUM) button repeatedly to enable the  
letters or numbers to be input.  
2 Press the number buttons repeatedly to  
enter the letters or numbers that you  
want.  
You can enter the letter shown on each  
button by pressing it repeatedly.  
You can enter the number shown on  
each button by pressing it.  
Using the Menus 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To enter a symbol  
Press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT  
(SYMBOL) button repeatedly to select the  
desired symbol. Pressing the 0 button  
repeatedly also enables you to enter a  
symbol.  
To enter a dot (.) for an IP address  
Press the  
button.  
To delete a character  
Press the PinP (BACK SPACE) button. The  
last entered character is deleted.  
To delete all characters in a line  
Move the cursor to the line to be deleted,  
then press the DISPLAY (CLEAR) button.  
Note  
When you press the HELP button on the  
Remote Commander to show balloon helps or  
help screens, you can hide only the balloon  
help used for entering characters.  
Select “Character Input Help” from the  
General Setup menu, then select “Off”. (See  
page 53.)  
42 Using the Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Hold down the MENU button.  
The Setup menu for the administrator  
appears on the monitor screen.  
Chapter 2:  
Setup  
Registration and  
Setup for System  
Administrators  
Dial  
Answer  
Status  
Communication  
Audio  
Video  
General  
LAN  
Administrator  
ISDN  
Information  
This chapter describes the registration and  
settings to be carried out by the system  
administrator.The chapter is intended to be  
read by the system administrator.  
Note  
You can also display the Setup menu for  
the administrator by pressing the numeric  
button 9 on the Remote Commander twice  
while the Setup menu or the screen in  
communication is displayed.  
Registering Local  
Information  
Choosing the following items from the  
Setup menu for the administrator opens  
the respective menus.  
Dial: Dial Setup menu (see page 44)  
46)  
Communication: Communication  
Setup menu (see page 46)  
Status: Status menu (see page 49)  
Audio: Audio Setup menu  
(see page 50)  
Before starting a conference, register the  
required information on the local terminals  
of the system using the Setup menu for  
administrator. This section describes how to  
display the Setup menus for the  
administrator and gives a introduction to the  
menus.  
Opening the Setup Menu for  
the Administrator  
Video: Video Setup menu  
(see page 52)  
General: General Setup menu  
Administrator: Administrator Setup  
menu (see page 56)  
LAN: LAN Setup menu (see page 59)  
ISDN: ISDN Setup menu (see page 64)  
Information: Information menu (see  
page 67)  
1 Press the MENU button on the  
Remote Commander, or use the V, v,  
B or b button to select “MENU” in the  
launcher menu, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
The Setup menu appears on the monitor  
screen.  
Setup  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select the  
menu you want to set, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
Press and hold the [MENU] button to show more  
detailed setup menus.  
Registering Local Information 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The selected setup menu appears.  
Dial Setup Menu  
Dial Setup  
The Dial Setup menu is used to set the  
attributes for dialing.  
Page:  
1/2  
Line I/F  
Bonding  
IP  
Auto  
Auto  
Off  
Telephone Mode  
More Options Enable  
User Name Input  
Page 1/2  
Off  
Dial Setup  
Page:  
1/2  
Line I/F  
Bonding  
IP  
Save  
Cancel  
Auto  
Auto  
Off  
Telephone Mode  
More Options Enable  
User Name Input  
Off  
4 Set the respective items.  
For details on individual items, see the  
relevant menu pages.  
Save  
Cancel  
5 After the setting is completed, use the  
V, v, B or b button to select “Save”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Line I/F  
Allows you to select the line interface that  
you normally use.  
IP: Connects a videoconferencing system  
via a LAN.  
The setting is saved, and the Setup menu  
(for the administrator) is restored.  
ISDN: Connects a videoconferencing  
To cancel the setup  
system via ISDN.  
ISDN (Telephone): Connects an audio-only  
telephone via ISDN (voice meeting).  
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote  
Commander to select “Cancel”, then press  
the PUSH ENTER button. Or press the  
RETURN button on the Remote  
Commander.  
*
Bonding  
Allows you to select whether you use a  
process called bonding to connect multiple  
ISDN lines.  
Through bonding, the connection of one line  
enables you to automatically connect all  
other lines.  
To page up or down the selected  
menu  
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote  
Commander to select the Page box, then  
press the b button to advance the page and  
the B button to go back to the previous page.  
*
Bonding (Bandwidth on Demand  
Interoperability Group) is a registered  
trademark of THE BONDING  
CONSORTIUM.  
Auto: Automatically activates the  
connection through bonding if this  
feature is available at the remote party.  
On: Always connects a remote party  
through bonding.  
Telephone Mode  
Allows you to select the audio compression  
format when conducting a voice meeting.  
Auto: Selects an appropriate format  
automatically.  
44 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
G.711µ-law: Selects the format based on the  
G.711µ-law standard.  
G.711A-law: Selects the format based on  
the G.711A-law standard.  
Prefix-C: Select when you use the prefix set  
in “Prefix-C” on page 2 of the Dial Setup  
menu.  
Prefix-A  
More Options Enable  
“Prefix” on page 1 of the Dial Setup menu is  
set to “Prefix-A”, the line number prefixed  
by the prefix (dial number) registered in this  
box is dialed.  
Allows you to select whether you can  
modify individual dial lists in the Dial Setup  
menu.  
On: Enables the setting of each dial list.  
When you select “More Options  
Enable” in the List Edit menu of the  
Phone Book, the Dial Setup menu  
appears.  
Prefix-B  
“Prefix” on page 1 of the Dial Setup menu is  
set to “Prefix-B”, the line number prefixed  
by the prefix (dial number) registered in this  
box is dialed.  
Off: Enables the application of settings to all  
the dial lists in the Dial Setup menu  
simultaneously.  
Prefix-C  
“Prefix” on page 1 of the Dial Setup menu is  
set to “Prefix-C”, the line number prefixed  
by the prefix (dial number) registered in this  
box is dialed.  
User Name Input  
Allows you to select whether to register  
users names in the communications log  
before communication starts.  
On: Select when you want to record user  
names. Each time dialing takes place,  
the user name input menu appears.  
Off: Disables the recording of the user  
names.  
Note  
Enter “9” when this is required to make an  
outgoing call.  
Select LAN Prefix  
Allows you to select whether to use the LAN  
prefix.  
Enable:Enable the LAN prefix.  
Disable:Disable the LAN prefix.  
Page 2/2  
LAN Prefix  
Dial  
When connecting via a LAN, the information  
entered into this box is added to the beginning  
of the IP address. Select whether to use the  
LAN prefix in the Select LAN Prefix option.  
Page:  
2/2  
Prefix  
Prefix-None  
Prefix-A  
Prefix-B  
Prefix-C  
Select LAN Prefix  
LAN Prefix  
Enable  
Save  
Cancel  
Prefix  
Select the prefix number (call number  
prefixed to a line number).  
Prefix-None: Select when you are not using  
a prefix number.  
Prefix-A: Select when you use the prefix set  
in “Prefix-A” on page 2 of the Dial  
Setup menu.  
Prefix-B: Select when you use the prefix set  
in “Prefix-B” on page 2 of the Dial Setup  
menu.  
Registering Local Information 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Answer Setup Menu  
Communication Setup Menu  
The Answer Setup menu is used to set up  
call reception.  
The Communication Setup menu is used to  
set up communications.  
Note  
Page 1/1  
Contents of the Communication Setup menu  
vary according to the settings configured by  
“Individual Settings”, and to whether the  
MCU software (see page 169) is installed or  
not.  
Answer  
Page:  
1/1  
Auto Answer  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
ISDN MSN  
Mic on Answer  
Page 1/3  
Reject Answer  
Communication  
Page:  
1/3  
Save  
Cancel  
Individual Settings  
Number of Lines  
LAN Bandwidth  
Off  
1B  
64Kbps  
Auto Answer  
Allows you to select whether the system  
answers calls automatically.  
Auto Answer: Answers calls automatically.  
When a call comes in, the line is  
automatically connected.  
Save  
Cancel  
Off: Allows you to answer calls manually.  
When a call comes in, the phone rings. If  
you select “OK” in the “Respond?”  
message, the line is connected.  
Individual Settings  
Allows you to select whether to perform  
transmission, reception, and multipoint  
settings individually.  
On: Select toperformtransmission, reception,  
and multipoint settings individually.  
Off: Select to perform all settings  
simultaneously.  
ISDN MSN  
Allows you to select whether you are using  
the Multiple Subscriber Number.  
On: Select when you use the Multiple  
Subscriber Number.  
Number of Lines  
Off: Select when you do not use the  
Multiple Subscriber Number.  
Allows you to select the number of ISDN  
channels used in bonding calls. If you set  
“Individual Settings” to “On” on page 1 of  
the Communication Setup menu, you can  
perform this setting individually for  
transmission, reception, and multipoint  
conferencing.  
Mic on Answer  
Allows you to select whether to transmit  
audio from your site when answering a call  
from the remote party.  
On: Transmit audio when answering a call.  
Off: Do not transmit audio when answering  
a call.  
LAN Bandwidth  
Allows you to select the bandwidth used  
when connected to a LAN. If you set  
“Individual Settings” to “On” on page 1 of  
the Communication Setup menu, you can  
perform this setting individually for  
transmission, reception, and multipoint  
conferencing.  
Reject Answer  
Allows you to select whether to connect a  
remote party calling during a multipoint  
videoconference.  
On: Disables the connection of a remote party.  
Off: Enables the connection of a remote  
party.  
46 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Auto: Switch the number of frames  
automatically.  
Page 2/3  
15fps: Send CIF format pictures at a  
maximum rate of 15 frames per second.  
30fps: Send CIF format pictures at a  
maximum rate of 30 frames per second.  
Communication  
Page:  
2/3  
Video Mode  
Auto  
On  
Interlace Mode  
4CIF Mode  
Audio Mode  
On  
Allows you to select the compression format  
of audio to be sent to a remote party. If you  
set “Individual Settings” to “On” on page 1  
of the Communication Setup menu, you can  
perform this setting individually for  
transmission, reception, and multipoint  
conferencing.  
Video Frame  
Audio Mode  
Restrict  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Save  
Cancel  
Auto: Send audio matching the compression  
format of the remote site.  
MPEG4 Audio: Send audio based on the  
MPEG4 AAC format.  
G.722.1: Send audio based on the G.722.1  
standard.  
G.722: Send audio based on the G.722  
standard.  
G.729: Sends audio based on the G.729  
Video Mode  
Allows you to select the compression format of  
pictures sent to a remote party. If you set  
“Individual Settings” to “On” on page 1 of the  
Communication Setup menu, you can perform  
this setting individually for transmission,  
reception, and multipoint conferencing.  
Auto: Send pictures matching the format of  
the remote site.  
standard.  
H.264: Send pictures based on the H.264  
G.728: Sends audio based on the G.728  
standard.  
G.723.1: Sends audio based on the G.723.1  
standard.  
G.711: Sends audio based on the G.711  
standard.  
format.  
MPEG4: Send pictures based on the  
MPEG4 format.  
H.263+: Send pictures based on the H.263+  
format.  
H.261: Send pictures based on the H.261  
format (when sending still images using  
Annex D).  
Interlace Mode  
Allows you to specify whether to use the  
interlace SIF format in video mode.  
On: Use the interlace SIF format.  
Off:Not to use the interlace SIF format.  
4CIF Mode  
Allows you to specify whether to use the 4CIF  
format in video mode.  
On: Use the 4CIF format.  
Off:Not to use the 4CIF format.  
Video Frame  
Allows you to select the number of video  
frames during transmission. If you set  
“Individual Settings” to “On” on page 1 of the  
Communication Setup menu, you can perform  
this setting individually for transmission,  
reception, and multipoint conferencing.  
Registering Local Information 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T.120 Data  
Note  
Allows you to select whether to perform data  
conferences with the T.120 standard using  
NetMeeting (only for ISDN connections). If you  
set “Individual Settings” to “On” on page 1 of the  
Communication Setup menu, you can perform  
this setting individually for transmission,  
reception, and multipoint conferencing.  
When the remote videoconferencing system  
does not support the audio mode selected by  
the local site, the mode automatically becomes  
“G.711”.  
Restrict  
Allows you to select the ISDN transmission  
rate at dialing. If you set. “Individual  
Settings” to “On” on page 1 of the  
Communication Setup menu, you can  
perform this setting individually for  
transmission, reception, and multipoint  
conferencing.  
Auto: Select when connecting a remote  
party via a normal ISDN line.  
56K: Select when connecting a remote party  
located in a region or country where the  
ISDN transmission rate is 56 Kbps.  
Off: Disables T.120 data conferences.  
For details about T.120 data conferences,  
see “Conducting a Data Conference Using  
NetMeeting T.120 Data Conference” on  
page 138.  
H.239  
Allows you to select whether you can use the  
dual video presentation mode based on the  
H.239 standard. If you set “Individual  
Settings” to “On” on page 1 of the  
Communication Setup menu, you can  
perform this setting individually for  
transmission, reception, and multipoint  
conferencing.  
On: Enables the dual video presentation  
mode based on the H.239 standard.  
Off: Disables the dual video presentation  
mode based on the H.239 standard.  
Note  
The system is set to connect an ISDN line at the  
transmission rate of 64 Kbps by default.  
However, some countries, such as the USA,  
and some regions may use the ISDN  
transmission rate of 64 Kbps and 56 Kbps. You  
may not communicate with such countries or  
regions at 64 Kbps, so you must therefore set  
“Restrict” to “56K” before dialing.  
Page 4/4  
Page 3/3  
This page is only displayed when MCU  
software (page 169) is installed.  
Communication  
Page:  
3/3  
Communication  
Far End Camera Control  
T. 120 Data  
On  
Off  
On  
Page:  
4/4  
H
239  
Multipoint Mode  
Auto  
Broadcast Mode  
Split  
Split  
Automatic  
Full Screen  
Sender Screen  
Save  
Cancel  
Save  
Cancel  
Far End Camera Control  
Allows you to select whether to enable the  
control of each other's cameras from each  
other's site.  
On: Enables the control of each other's  
cameras. This is the default setting.  
Multipoint Mode  
Allows you to select whether to conduct  
multipoint videoconferences.  
Auto: Switch from two-point  
videoconference to multipoint  
videoconference automatically.  
Off: Disables the control of each other's  
cameras.  
48 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
On: Always conducts a multipoint  
Status Menu  
videoconference.  
The Status menu shows the current status of  
communication.  
The ISDN Line Status, LAN Line Status or  
LAN Connection Status will also be  
displayed depending on the line interface  
used.  
Broadcast Mode  
Allows you to select the broadcast mode.  
Split: Displays the video from the connected  
terminals in split windows.  
Voice Activate: Detects the terminal where  
the speaker has the loudest voice, and  
sends the video from this terminal to all  
other terminals.  
Communication Status  
One page for each point connected to the  
system will be displayed. The connected  
point is shown at the upper right corner of  
the page as “Connection A (or B, C....)”.  
The terminal’s name of the point is also  
displayed at its side.  
The items below are shown both in the  
columns for “Encode” and “Decode”. The  
descriptions under “Encode” show the setting  
status of the local system and those under  
“Decode” show the status of the receiving.  
Split  
Allows you to select the type of split display  
used to display local and remote video on a  
single monitor during a multipoint  
videoconference.  
Automatic: When there are up to three  
terminals, the display is automatically  
split into four. When there are four or  
five terminals, the display is  
automatically split into six.  
Six-screen Mosaic: The display is split into  
six, regardless of the number of  
terminals.  
Page 1/2  
Status  
Sender Screen  
Page:  
1/2  
Allows you to select the monitor display of  
transmitting monitors during multipoint  
videoconference.  
Full Screen:Display the entire screen.  
Automatic: When there are up to three  
terminals, the display is automatically  
split into four. When there are four or  
five terminals, the display is  
(Encode)  
G.728  
(Decode)  
G.728  
Audio Mode  
Video Mode  
Frame Rate  
LSD Rate  
H.261 CIF  
15fps  
H.261 CIF  
15fps  
6400  
Off  
MLP Rate  
62.4K  
HMLP Rate  
Cancel  
automatically split into six.  
Six-screen Mosaic: The display is split into  
six, regardless of the number of  
terminals.  
Audio Mode  
Displays the current audio encoding format.  
Video Mode  
Displays the current video encoding format.  
Note  
The audio encoding and video encoding  
formats used for communication with a remote  
party may differ from the settings in this menu,  
depending on the status of videoconferencing  
system on the remote site.  
Frame Rate  
Displays the maximum frame rate of motion  
pictures.  
Registering Local Information 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LSD Rate  
Displays the LSD (Low Speed Data) rate.  
Audio Setup Menu  
The Audio Setup menu is used to set various  
audio items.  
MLP Rate  
Displays the MLP (Multi Layer Protocol)  
rate.  
Page 1/2  
The level meter indicating the audio input  
level is displayed.  
HMLP Rate  
Displays the HMLP (High Speed Multi  
Layer Protocol) rate.  
Audio  
Page:  
1/2  
Page 2/2  
Input Select  
Mic Select  
CTE  
MIC  
MIC  
Off  
Status  
Page:  
2/2  
Echo Canceller  
Lip Sync  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
BRI  
Camera Control  
Data Control  
Line I/F  
Recording Mute  
On  
2
x
64K  
Save  
Cacel  
Rate  
On  
On  
DSB  
Whiteboard  
Input Select  
Cancel  
Allows you to select the audio input.  
MIC: Inputs audio from the microphone.  
AUX: Inputs audio from auxiliary external  
equipment.  
MIC+AUX: Inputs audio from the  
microphone and auxiliary external  
equipment.  
Camera Control  
Displays whether control of each other's  
camera is enabled.  
Data Control  
Displays whether the T.120 data conference  
is enabled.  
Mic Select  
Allows you to select the microphone to be  
used.  
MIC: Uses the microphone connected to the  
Communication Terminal.  
Line I/F  
Displays the line interface you are using.  
DSB MIC: Uses the microphone connected  
to the Data Solution Box.  
LINE: Uses the microphone connected to  
Rate  
Displays the number of lines connected and  
transmission rate during communication.  
the AUDIO IN LINE jack.  
DSB  
CTE  
Displays whether the PCSA-DSB1S Data  
Solution Box is connected.  
Allows you to select the input where the  
CTE-600 Communication Transducer is  
connected.  
Off: Does not use the CTE-600  
Communication Transducer.  
LINE: Inputs from the AUDIO IN LINE  
jack of the Communication Terminal.  
DSB AUX IN: Inputs from the AUX IN jack  
of the Data Solution box.  
Whiteboard  
Displays whether the mimio Xi attached to  
your whiteboard is enabled.  
50 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Echo Canceller  
Sound Effect  
Allows you to select whether to use the echo  
canceller.  
On: Enables the echo canceller.  
Allows you to select whether to output  
sounds when the system starts, a  
videoconference starts or ends.  
On: Outputs sounds.  
Off: Disables the echo canceller.  
Off: Does not output sounds.  
Lip Sync  
Dial Tone  
Allows you to select whether to use the Lip  
Sync function.  
On: Enables the Lip Sync function.  
Off: Disables the Lip Sync function.  
Allows you to select whether to output a  
ring-back and busy tones when you are  
dialing.  
On: Outputs dial tones.  
Off: Does not output dial tones.  
Recording Mute  
When you connect an audio recording  
device to the AUDIO IN AUX and AUDIO  
OUT MIXED jacks to record the conference  
audio, the recording mute function prevents  
echo from affecting remote sites. This is  
only available when “Input Select” is set to  
“AUX” or “MIC + AUX”.  
Ringer Tone  
Allows you to select whether to output a  
ringer tone when you receive a call.  
On: Outputs the ringer tone.  
Off: Does not output the ringer tone.  
On: Enables the recording mute function.  
Off: Disables the recording mute function.  
Page 2/2  
The level meter indicating the audio input  
level is displayed.  
Audio  
Page:  
2/2  
Beep Sound  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Sound Effect  
Dial Tone  
Ringer Tone  
Save  
Cacel  
Beep Sound  
Allows you to select whether the system  
beeps each time you press a button on the  
Remote Commander.  
On: Enables beeping.  
Off: Disables beeping.  
Registering Local Information 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUX1: Selects the video signal from the  
device connected to the MAIN AUX IN  
connector.  
Video Setup Menu  
The following menus appear when you  
select “Video” on the Setup menu for the  
administrator. Select the desired menu.  
SUB  
Allows you to select the video input for  
Input 2.  
Video Setup  
CAMERA: Selects the video signal from  
the device connected to the SUB  
CAMERA connector.  
Input Video  
Custom Input Label  
Monitor Out  
IR2: Selects the video signal from the  
optional PCS-DS150/DS150P  
Document Stand.  
AUX2: Selects the video signal from the  
device connected to the SUB AUX IN  
connector.  
Cancel  
Custom Input Label Page 1/1  
Video Input Page 1/1  
Video Setup  
Custom Input Label  
Video Setup  
Page:  
1/1  
Dual Video  
Connection  
Off  
Main Camera  
MAIN  
SUB  
CAMERA  
IR1  
AUX1  
CAMERA  
IR2  
AUX2  
IR1  
AUX1  
Sub Camera  
IR2  
Monitor  
AUX2  
Split  
Off  
Save  
Cacel  
Save  
Cancel  
Allows you to set the names displayed in the  
Video Input Select menu.  
Main Camera: Allows you to enter the  
name displayed when “Main Camera” is  
selected in the Video Input Select  
screen.  
Dual Video  
Allows you to split the display in two.  
On: Enables dual video.  
Off: Disables dual video.  
IR1: Allows you to enter the name displayed  
when “IR1” is selected in the Video  
Input Select screen.  
AUX1: Allows you to enter the name  
displayed when “AUX1” is selected in  
the Video Input Select screen.  
Sub Camera: Allows you to enter the name  
displayed when “Secondary camera” is  
selected in the Video Input Select  
screen.  
Split  
Allows you to split the display in two.  
Off: Does not split the display.  
Horizontal: Splits the display horizontally.  
Vertical: Splits the display vertically.  
MAIN  
Allows you to select the video input for  
Input 1.  
CAMERA: Selects the video signal from  
the device connected to the MAIN  
CAMERA connector.  
IR2: Allows you to enter the name displayed  
when “IR2” is selected in the Video  
Input Select screen.  
IR1: Selects the video signal from the  
optional PCS-DS150/DS150P  
Document Stand.  
AUX2: Allows you to enter the name  
displayed when “AUX2” is selected in  
the Video Input Select screen.  
52 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Monitor Out  
General Setup Menu  
The following menus appear when you  
select “General” on the Setup menu for  
the administrator. Select the desired  
menu.  
Monitor Out  
VIDEO2  
Monitors  
1
VIDEO1  
Main  
RGB OUT  
RGB OUT(DSB)  
Connection  
General Setup  
Sub  
Sub  
Device Setup  
Menu Screens  
Whiteboard  
Launcher  
Monitor  
Save  
Cancel  
Monitors  
Allows you to specify the number of  
monitors connected to the system.  
1: One monitor connected.  
Cancel  
2: Two monitors connected.  
3: Three monitors connected.  
Device Setup Page 1/2  
Connection  
General  
Device Setup  
Select the connector(s) used to connect the  
monitor(s).  
Page:  
1/2  
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS  
11/30/2003 19:25:53  
VIDEO 1: Select when the monitor is  
connected to the VIDEO 1 connector.  
VIDEO 2: Select when the monitor is  
connected to the VIDEO 2 connector.  
RGB OUT: Select when the monitor is  
connected to the RGB OUT connector of  
the main unit.  
Clock Set  
Terminal Name  
Standby Mode  
Off  
Standby Time  
Last Number Registration  
Control by Far End  
On  
On  
Save  
Cancel  
RGB OUT (DSB): Select when the monitor  
is connected to the RGB OUT connector  
of the Data Solution Box.  
Clock Set  
Enter the current date and time.  
Monitor  
Terminal Name  
Input the terminal name to report when the  
system is connected to the remote system.  
Select whether to use the connected monitor  
as the sub- or main monitor.  
Main: The connected monitor is used as the  
main monitor.  
Sub: The connected monitor is used as a  
sub-monitor.  
Standby Mode  
Allows you to select whether the  
Communication Terminal enters standby  
mode if idle for a specified period of time.  
On: Allows the system to go on standby.  
Off: Does not allow the system to go on  
standby.  
Standby Time  
Specify the time the system must remain idle  
before entering the standby mode. This time  
can be between 1 and 99 minutes.  
Registering Local Information 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
For details on the standby mode, see  
“Standby Mode Function” on page 29.  
MODE 1: Select when using mode 1. This  
setting does not usually need to be  
changed.  
MODE 2: Select when using mode 2. Select  
this mode when the system does not  
operate properly under “MODE 1”.  
MODE 3: Select when using mode 3.  
MODE 4: Select when using mode 4.  
Last Number Registration  
Allows you to select whether to register the  
remote party in the Phone Book after the  
conference is finished.  
On: If the remote party is not registered in  
the Phone Book, the “Register this  
participant in the list?” message appears  
on the monitor screen when conference  
finishes. When you select “OK”, the List  
Edit menu opens.  
T.120 PC Address  
When conducting a data conference based  
for ISDN connections.)  
Off: The message above does not appear and  
remote party registration does not take  
place.  
For details on data conferences based on the  
T.120 standard, see “Conducting a Data  
Conference Using NetMeeting – T.120 Data  
Conference” on page 138.  
Control by Far End  
When “Far End Camera Control” is set to  
“On” in the Communication Setup menu,  
you can temporarily reject the camera  
control command transmitted by the remote  
party.  
Menu Screens Page 1/3  
General  
Menu Screens  
On: Accepts the camera control command.  
Off: Rejects the camera control command.  
Page:  
1/3  
Time Display  
On  
Off  
On  
Display Terminal Name  
Character Input Help  
Device Setup Page 2/2  
General  
Device Setup  
Page:  
2/2  
Save  
Cancel  
Language  
English  
MODE1  
IR Repeater Mode  
T.120 PC Address  
.
.
.
Time Display  
Allows you to select whether you display the  
elapsed time on the monitor screen during a  
conference.  
Save  
Cancel  
On: Displays the elapsed time.  
Off: Does not display the elapsed time.  
Language  
Note  
Allows you to select the menu and display  
language used by the system. You can select  
from the following languages: English,  
French, German, Japanese, Spanish, Italian,  
Simplified Chinese, and Portuguese.  
During communication, some items that  
cannot be modified are also displayed.  
Display Terminal Name  
Allows you to select whether to display the  
connected terminal names on the monitor  
screen at the time of disconnection.  
Off: Not to display the terminal names.  
Show temporarily: Display the terminal  
names for a brief moment.  
IR Repeater Mode  
Allows you to select the Remote Controller  
mode of the IR repeater. You should  
normally select “MODE 1”.  
Always show: Display the terminal names.  
54 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Character Input Help  
Menu Screens 3/3  
Allows you to select whether to display  
menus and buttons of the launcher screen.  
Allows you to select whether to display help  
text when entering characters and numbers.  
On: Display help.  
Off: Not to display help.  
General  
Menu Screens  
Page:  
3/3  
Menu Screens 2/3  
Direct Phone Book Button  
On  
On  
On  
Allows you to select whether to display  
menus and buttons of the launcher screen.  
Direct Dial  
Guide  
General  
Menu Screens  
Page:  
2/3  
Save  
Cancel  
Phone Book Button  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Detailed Dial Button  
History Button  
Direct Phone Book Button  
On: Display “Direct Phone Book”.  
Off: Not to display “Direct Phone Book”.  
Menu Button  
Information Button  
Save  
Cancel  
Direct Dial  
On: Display the Direct Dial text box.  
Off: Not to display the Direct Dial text box.  
Phone Book Button  
On: Display “Phone Book”.  
Off: Not to display “Phone Book”.  
Guide  
On: Display the guide.  
Off: Not to display the guide.  
Detail Dial Button  
On: Display “Detail Dial”.  
Off: Not to display “Detail Dial”.  
Whiteboard Page 1/1  
General  
History Button  
Whiteboard  
On: Display “History”.  
Off: Not to display “History”.  
Page:  
1/1  
Whiteboard Attachment  
Vertical  
3'0"x4'0"  
Inches  
Whiteboard Size  
Menu Button  
Whiteboard Size Measurement  
On: Display “Menu”.  
Off: Not to display “Menu”.  
Information Button  
Save  
Cancel  
On: Display “Information”.  
Off: Not to display “Information”.  
Whiteboard Attachment  
Allows you to select whether to attach the  
optional mimio-Xi vertically or horizontally  
on a whiteboard.  
Vertical: Attaches the mimio-Xi vertically  
on a whiteboard.  
Horizontal: Attaches the mimio-Xi  
horizontally on a whiteboard.  
Registering Local Information 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Whiteboard Size  
Administrator Setup Menu  
Allows you to select the size (height ×  
width) of the whiteboard you are using. The  
sizes shown in the menu change according to  
“Whiteboard Attachment” setting.  
“Vertical” setting: Select from 2'0" × 3'0"  
(0.6 × 0.9 m), 3'0" × 4'0" (0.9 × 1.2 m),  
4'0" × 6'0" (1.2 × 1.8 m), and 4'0" × 8'0"  
(1.2 × 2.4 m).  
“Horizontal” setting: Select from 3'0" ×  
2'0" (0.9× 0.6 m), 4'0" × 3'0" (1.2 × 0.9  
m), 6'0" × 4'0" (1.8 × 1.2 m), and 8'0" ×  
4'0" (2.4 × 1.2 m).  
The following menus appear when you  
select “Administrator” on the Setup menu  
for the administrator. Select the desired  
menu.  
Administrator Setup  
Password  
Phone Book  
Other Settings  
Whiteboard Size Measurement  
Allows you to select whether to display the  
whiteboard size in inches or meters.  
Inches: Displays the whiteboard size in  
inches.  
Meters: Displays the whiteboard size in  
meters.  
Cancel  
The Administrator Setup menu is used for  
the system administrators. If you have set  
the password with this menu, you need to  
enter it when accessing the setup menus or  
Phone Book menus to change the items.  
Entering the password is also required to  
access the Administrator Setup menu.  
Password Page 1/3  
Administrator  
Password  
Page:  
1/3  
Administrator Password  
Phone Book Modification Password  
Save Settings Password  
Remote Access Password  
Save  
Cancel  
Administrator Password  
Set the system administrator password. This  
allows the system administrator to modify  
Administrator Setup and Phone Book menu  
items.  
Phone Book Modification Password  
Set the password used to modify the Phone  
Book.  
Save Settings Password  
Set the password used to save settings.  
56 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Remote Access Password  
General Setup  
Set the password to access the system  
through a Web browser. Access from a Web  
browser can also be enabled by entering the  
administrator password.  
Enable: Requires the password when saving  
the General Setup settings.  
Disable: Does not require the password  
when saving the General Setup settings.  
Password Page 2/3  
Password Page 3/3  
Specifies whether to require a password  
when saving each setting.  
Administrator  
Password  
Page:  
3/3  
Administrator  
LANSetup  
Enable  
Enable  
Password  
ISDN Setup  
Page:  
2/3  
Dial Setup  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Answer Setup  
Transmission Mode  
Audio Setup  
Video Setup  
General Setup  
Save  
Cancel  
Save  
Cancel  
LAN Setup  
Enable: Requires the password when saving  
the LAN Setup settings.  
Disable: Does not require the password  
when saving the LAN Setup settings.  
Dial Setup  
Enable: Requires the password when saving  
the Dial Setup settings.  
Disable: Does not require the password  
when saving the Dial Setup settings.  
ISDN Setup  
Enable: Requires the password when saving  
the ISDN Setup settings.  
Answer Setup  
Enable: Requires the password when saving  
the Answer Setup settings.  
Disable: Does not require the password  
when saving the ISDN Setup settings.  
Disable: Does not require the password  
Phone Book Page 1/2  
when saving the Answer Setup settings.  
Administrator  
Phone Book  
Transmission Mode  
Page:  
1/2  
Enable: Requires the password when saving  
the Communication Setup settings.  
Disable: Does not require the password  
when saving the Communication Setup  
settings.  
Save Phone Book  
Load Phone Book  
Clear Phone Book  
Audio Setup  
Save  
Cancel  
Enable: Requires the password when saving  
the Audio Setup settings.  
Disable: Does not require the password  
when saving the Audio Setup settings.  
Save Phone Book  
Allows you to save the data in the Phone Book  
on a “Memory Stick”. The data already on the  
“Memory Stick” is then overwritten.  
Video Setup  
Enable: Requires the password when saving  
the Video Setup settings.  
Load Phone Book  
Disable: Does not require the password  
Allows you to load the data in the Phone Book  
from a “Memory Stick”. The data already in  
the Phone Book is then overwritten.  
when saving the Video Setup settings.  
Registering Local Information 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clear Phone Book  
Allows you to delete a Phone book on a  
“Memory Stick” inserted into the system.  
Other Settings Page 1/1  
Administrator  
Other Settings  
Page:  
1/1  
Private Phone Book Page 2/2  
Web Monitor  
On  
Administrator  
Private Phone Book  
Page:  
2/2  
Auto Dialing  
Create Private Phone Book  
On  
Save  
Cancel  
Delete Private Phone Book  
Copy Private Phone Book  
Web Monitor  
Save  
Cancel  
Allows you to permit the monitoring  
conference status through a Web browser  
(automatic update of JPEG images).  
On: Permits monitoring with a Web  
browser.  
Off: Does not permit monitoring with a Web  
browser.  
Auto Dialing  
Allows you to automatically contact the  
remote parties of the selected Private Phone  
Book on a “Memory Stick” when you insert  
it into the system.  
On: Enables automatic dialing.  
Off: Disables automatic dialing.  
Create Private Phone Book  
Allows you to create an empty folder and  
file for a Private Phone Book on a “Memory  
Stick” inserted into the system.  
Delete Private Phone Book  
Allows you to delete the Private Phone Book  
on a “Memory Stick” inserted into the  
system.  
Copy to Private Phone book  
Allows you to copy the entire contents of the  
Phone Book to a Private Phone Book on a  
“Memory Stick” inserted into the system.  
58 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network Mask  
Enter the network mask.  
LAN Setup Menu  
The following menus appear when you  
select “LAN” on the Setup menu for the  
administrator. Select the desired menu.  
Gateway Address  
Enter the default gateway address.  
LAN Setup  
DNS Address  
Enter the DNS (Domain Name System)  
address.  
General  
Gatekeeper  
SNMP  
PPPoE  
General Page 2/2  
NAT/Port  
QoS  
LAN  
TOS  
General  
Encryption via LAN  
Page:  
2/2  
Cancel  
LAN Mode  
Auto Negotiation  
For details about the settings, consult your  
network administrator.  
General Page 1/2  
Save  
Cancel  
LAN  
General  
Page:  
1/2  
LAN Mode  
DHCP Mode  
Host Name  
Off  
Allows you to select the interface type and  
the communication mode of the LAN  
connection.  
Auto Negotiation: The interface type and  
the communication mode are detected  
automatically.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP Address  
Network Mask  
Gateway Address  
DNS Address  
Save  
Cancel  
100Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via  
100BASE-TX in full duplex mode.  
100Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via  
100BASE-TX in half duplex mode.  
10Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via  
10BASE-T in full duplex mode.  
10Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via  
10BASE-T in half duplex mode.  
DHCP Mode  
Allows you to select whether the Dynamic  
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server  
is enabled.  
Auto: The IP address network mask,  
gateway and DNS addresses are  
automatically assigned. You should  
confirm the assigned IP address in the  
launcher menu or the Information menu  
after the LAN connection is established.  
Off: Disables the DHCP server. In this case,  
enter an IP address, network mask,  
gateway and DNS addresses.  
Host Name  
Enter the host name.  
IP address  
Enter the IP address.  
Registering Local Information 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
On: Enables the SNMP agent.  
Off: Disables the SNMP agent.  
Gatekeeper Page 1/1  
LAN  
Gatekeeper  
Trap Destination  
Page:  
1/1  
Enter the address of the trap destination  
SNMP manager.  
Gatekeeper Mode  
Off  
.
.
.
Gatekeeper Address  
User Alias  
Community  
User Number  
Enter the community name managed by the  
SNMP manager. By default, this is “public”  
and this setting does not normally need to be  
changed.  
Save  
Cancel  
Description  
Gatekeeper Mode  
Enter the description of this terminal. By  
default, this is “Videoconference Device”  
and this description does not need to be  
changed.  
Allows you to select whether to use the  
gatekeeper to control access to a LAN.  
Using the gatekeeper allows you to dial  
using the user name or user number.  
Auto: Automatically detects the gatekeeper  
and uses it.  
Location  
Enter the location where this terminal is  
installed.  
On: Enables the gatekeeper.  
Off: Disables the gatekeeper.  
Contact  
Gatekeeper Address  
Enter information bout the terminal  
administrator.  
Enter the address of the gatekeeper used  
when “Gatekeeper Mode” is set to “On”.  
User Alias  
PPPoE Page 1/2  
Enter the user name (H.323 alias) registered  
in the gatekeeper.  
LAN  
PPPoE  
Page:  
1/2  
User Number  
PPPoE  
Off  
Enter the user number (E.164 number)  
registered in the gatekeeper.  
PPPoE User Name  
PPPoE Password  
SNMP Page 1/1  
LAN  
Save  
Cancel  
SNMP  
Page:  
1/1  
SNMP Mode  
Off  
PPPoE  
.
.
.
Trap Destination  
Community  
Allows you to select whether to use PPPoE  
for LAN connection. When using PPPoE,  
you can use the B FLET'S* or FLET'S  
ADSL service without connecting a router.  
On: Uses PPPoE for LAN connection.  
Off: Does not use PPPoE.  
Public  
Description  
Location  
Contact  
Videoconference Device  
Save  
Cancel  
Note  
SNMP Mode  
Operations of PPPoE for LAN connection are  
presently verified only for the Japanese NTT B  
FLET'S and FLET'S ADSL services.  
Allows you to select whether the Simple  
Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
agent is enabled.  
60 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
* “FLET’S” is a trademark of NTT East and  
NTT West Corporations in Japan.  
NAT/Port Page 1/1  
LAN  
NAT/Port  
Page:  
PPPoE User Name  
Enter a user name when you use PPPoE for  
LAN connection.  
1/1  
NAT Mode  
Off  
.
.
.
NAT Address  
Port Number Used  
PPPoE Password  
Enter a password when you use PPPoE for  
LAN connection.  
TCP Port Number  
UDP Port Number  
2253  
49152  
Save  
Cancel  
PPPoE Page 2/2  
LAN  
PPPoE  
NAT Mode  
Page:  
2/2  
Allows you to select whether you connect  
the system to a local network using Network  
Address Translation (NAT), which allows  
one IP address to be shared by several  
computers on the same LAN.  
Fixed IP for PPPoE  
Fixed IP Address for PPPoE  
PPPoE DNS  
Off  
.
.
.
Obtain automatically  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Primary DNS  
Secondary DNS  
On: Enables NAT mode.  
Off: Disables NAT mode.  
Save  
Cancel  
NAT Address  
Enter the IP address of a global network to  
be used for NAT mode.  
Fixed IP for PPPoE  
Select whether to make a PPPoE connection  
using a fixed IP address.  
Port Number Used  
On: Uses a fixed IP address for a PPPoE  
connection.  
Off: Does not use a fixed IP address for a  
PPPoE connection.  
Allows you to select whether to fix the TCP  
port and UDP port numbers.  
Custom: Uses the port numbers set by the  
user.  
Default: Uses the default port numbers:  
2253 as the TCP port number and 49152  
as the UDP port number.  
Fixed IP Address for PPPoE  
Enter an IP address when “Fixed IP for  
PPPoE” is set to “On”.  
TCP Port Number  
When “Port Number Used” is set to  
“Custom”, enter the TCP port number.  
PPPoE DNS  
Allows you to select whether to obtain DNS  
server addresses automatically or to specify  
them manually when connecting to a LAN  
using PPPoE.  
When “Port Number Used” is set to  
“Custom”, enter the UDP port number.  
Specify Allows you to specify DNS server  
addresses.  
For details on the port numbers used,  
See “List of Port Numbers Used on the  
PCS-PG70/PG70P” on page 220.  
Obtain automatically: Assigns DNS server  
addresses automatically.  
Primary DNS  
Enter a primary DNS address.  
Secondary DNS  
Enter a secondary DNS address.  
Registering Local Information 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
QoS Page 1/1  
Type of Service (TOS) Page 1/1  
LAN  
LAN  
QoS  
TOS  
Page:  
1/1  
Page:  
TOS  
1/1  
Hybrid  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Forward Error Correction  
Packet Resend Request  
IP Precedence  
Low Delay  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Adaptive Rate Control  
High Throughput  
High Reliability  
Minimum Cost  
Save  
Cancel  
Save  
Cancel  
Hybrid  
TOS  
Allows you to select whether to use forward  
error correction, send requests to resend  
packets, and use adaptive rate control  
depending on the network status.  
On: Forward Error Correction, Packet  
Resend Request, or Adaptive Rate  
Control is used automatically depending  
on the network status.  
Allows you to select how to define the Type  
of Service (TOS) field.  
Off: Does not define the TOS field.  
IP Precedence: Defines the TOS field as IP  
Precedence.  
Diffserve: Defines the TOS field as  
Diffserve.  
IP Precedence  
Enter the IP Precedence value, between 0 and 7.  
Off: The three functions above are not used  
automatically depending on the network  
status.  
Low Delay  
Forward Error Correction  
Allows you to select whether to specify the  
Low Delay bit rate of the TOS field.  
On: Specifies the Low Delay bit rate of the  
TOS field.  
Allows you to select whether received  
packets containing errors are corrected upon  
reception.  
Off: Does not specify the Low Delay bit rate  
On: Corrects packets.  
Off: Does not correct packets.  
of the TOS field.  
High Throughput  
Packet Resend Request  
Allows you to select whether to specify the  
High Throughput bit rate of the TOS field.  
On: Specifies the High Throughput bit rate  
of the TOS field.  
Allows you to select whether to request  
packet to be resent when packet losses occur  
during communication.  
On: Requests packets to be resent.  
Off: Does not request packets to be resent.  
Off: Does not specify the High Throughput  
bit rate of the TOS field.  
Adaptive Rate Control  
Allows you to select whether to always  
optimize the LAN bandwidth.  
On: Always optimizes the LAN bandwidth.  
Off: Does not optimize the LAN bandwidth.  
High Reliability  
Allows you to select whether to specify the  
High Reliability bit rate of the TOS field.  
On: Specifies the High Reliability bit rate of  
the TOS field.  
Off: Does not specify the High Reliability  
bit rate of the TOS field.  
Note  
You can only configure “Adaptive Rate  
Control” when “Packet Resend Request” is set  
to “Off”. When “Packet Resend Request” is set  
to “On”, “Adaptive Rate Control” is also  
always set to “On”.  
62 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
different encryption password. You can start  
an unencrypted videoconference with a  
terminal connected via an ISDN.  
• The encryption function is not available  
when you connect to other terminals through  
cascade LAN and ISDN connections.  
Minimum Cost  
Allows you to select whether to specify the  
Minimum Cost bit rate of the TOS field.  
On: Specifies the Minimum Cost bit rate of  
the TOS field.  
Off: Does not specify the Minimum Cost bit  
rate of the TOS field.  
Diffserve  
Enter the Diffserve value, between 0 and 64.  
This item only appears when “TOS” is set to  
“Diffserve”.  
Encryption via LAN Page 1/1  
LAN  
Encryption via LAN  
Page:  
1/1  
Encryption via LAN  
On  
Encryption Password  
Save  
Cancel  
Configure the “Encryption via LAN”  
function to conduct encrypted  
videoconferences. When you enable this  
function, only those terminals who input the  
password defined here can connect to the  
videoconference, allowing for greater  
security.  
For details about encrypted  
videoconferences, see chapter 7.  
Encryption via LAN  
Allows you to select whether to use the  
encryption feature for videoconferences.  
On: Uses the encryption feature.  
Off: Does not use the encryption feature.  
Encryption Password  
Enter the password necessary to start an  
encrypted videoconference.  
Notes  
• When “Encryption via LAN” is set to “On”,  
you cannot start a videoconference if your  
terminal is not equipped with the encryption  
feature, a terminal with “Encryption via  
LAN” set to “Off”, or a terminal with a  
Registering Local Information 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ISDN Page 2/4  
ISDN Setup Menu  
ISDN  
The ISDN Setup menu is used to set up  
ISDN lines.  
Page:  
2/4  
Area Code  
Local Number  
A1  
Note  
A2  
B1  
B2  
C1  
C2  
The ISDN Setup menu only appears when  
the optional PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S or  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit is installed in your  
system.  
Save  
Cancel  
ISDN Page 1/4  
Area Code  
ISDN  
Enter the area code of the ISDN line to be  
used. Do not enter the first 0 of the area code.  
Page:  
1/3  
Country/Region  
Protocol  
USA  
National ISDN  
Local Number  
Enter the line number (local number) of the  
ISDN line to be used.  
ISDN Page 3/4  
Save  
Cancel  
The A1 to C2 fields appear.  
ISDN  
Country/Region  
Page:  
3/4  
Allows you to select the country or region  
where you are using the Communication  
Terminal. You can select between Europe  
(except France), France, Japan, USA, China,  
and Other.  
Sub Address  
A1:  
A2:  
B1:  
B2:  
C1:  
C2:  
Protocol  
Allows you to select the protocol of the  
ISDN lines to be used. You can select Japan  
(NTT), Euro ISDN, Euro ISDN (France),  
National ISDN, 5ESS (P-MP), 5ESS (P-P),  
or DMS-100, depending on the interface that  
you are using.  
5ESS(P-MP), 5ESS(P-P) or DMS-100  
depending on the interface you are using.  
Save  
Cancel  
Sub Address  
Enter sub-addresses when registering them.  
Sub-addresses can only be composed of  
Notes  
• When you select an empty field and then  
press the PUSH ENTER button of the  
Remote Commander, the setting of the  
previous field is copied into the selected  
field.  
For customers in the USA and Canada, see  
“SPID Settings for Customers in the USA  
and Canada” on page 65.  
64 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• CH1 to Ch23 (T1), Ch1 to Ch30 (E1) text  
boxes appear when using the PCSA-PRI  
ISDN Unit.  
SPID Settings for Customers  
ISDN  
If you connect to an ISDN switch type,  
configuration of SPID (Service Profile  
Identifier) is required. When you select  
“Auto SPID” in the ISDN Setup Wizard  
(See page 34), the “Area Code”, “Local  
Number” and “SPID” setup items are  
automatically set. If “Auto SPID” is not  
available in your area, set up SPID manually  
using the ISDN Setup menu.  
Page:  
3/4  
Sub Address  
Ch1:  
Ch2:  
Ch3:  
Ch4:  
Ch5:  
Ch6:  
Save  
Cancel  
1 Open the ISDN Setup menu.  
• When using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit,  
the D1 to F2 text boxes appear on the next  
page. Fill in the D1 to F2 text boxes  
2 Enter the country code in the Country/  
Region Code text box depending on  
the network switch type you are using.  
according to the lines that you are using.  
ISDN Page 4/4  
AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN), NTI  
DMS-100 (National ISDN): Enter “1”.  
AT&T 5ESS (Multipoint Custom  
ISDN): Enter “1*10”.  
ISDN  
Page:  
4/4  
SPID  
AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point Custom  
ISDN): Enter “1*12”.  
NTI DMS-100 (Custom ISDN): Enter  
“1*11”.  
A1:  
A2:  
B1:  
B2:  
C1:  
C2:  
ISDN  
Page:  
1/7  
Save  
Cancel  
Country/Region  
USA  
Area Code  
Protocol  
1
SPID  
Nation ISDN  
Enter SPID (Service Profile Identifier).  
For customers in the USA and Canada, see  
see “SPID Settings for Customers in the  
USA and Canada” on this page.  
Save  
Cancel  
Auto SPID  
This item is used only for customers in the  
USA and Canada.  
3 Open page 2 of the ISDN Setup menu  
to enter the LDN (Local Directory  
Number) in the Local Number text  
boxes.  
For details, see see “SPID Settings for  
Customers in the USA and Canada” on page  
65.  
When you use the AT&T 5ESS  
(Multipoint Custom ISDN) or AT&T  
5ESS (Point-to-Point Custom ISDN)  
switch type  
Enter the same LDNs in the A1 and A2  
(B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending on  
the number of lines you use) text boxes.  
Registering Local Information 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enter the SPID in the A1 text box only.  
ISDN  
ISDN  
Page:  
2/7  
Page:  
6/7  
Area Code  
Local Number  
SPID  
A1 408  
A2 408  
B1  
9876532  
9876532  
A1: 019876532001  
A2:  
B1:  
B2:  
C1:  
C2:  
B2  
C1  
C2  
Auto SPID  
Save  
Cancel  
Save  
Cancel  
When you use the NTI DMS-100  
(National ISDN) or NTI DMS-100  
(Custom ISDN) switch type  
Enter the different LDNs in the A1 and  
A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending  
on the number of lines you use) text  
boxes. These switch types are given a  
separate number for each channel.  
For the NTI DMS-100 (National ISDN),  
NTI DMS-100 (Custom ISDN), AT&T  
5ESS (National ISDN) switch type  
Enter the different SPID numbers in the  
A1 and A2 text boxes.  
ISDN  
Page:  
6/7  
SPID  
ISDN  
A1: 019876543001  
Page:  
2/7  
A2: 019876544001  
Area Code  
Local Number  
9876543  
B1:  
B2:  
C1:  
C2:  
A1 408  
A2 408  
B1  
9876544  
B2  
C1  
Save  
Cancel  
C2  
Auto SPID  
Save  
Cancel  
For the AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point  
Custom ISDN) switch type  
You do not need to set up the SPID, then  
no entry in the A1 and A2 (B1 and B2,  
C1 and C2, depending on the number of  
lines you use) is required.  
When you use the AT&T 5ESS  
(National ISDN) switch type  
You may enter the same or different  
numbers in two channels.  
4 Open page 6 (SPID setup menu) to  
Notes  
enter the SPID.  
• If you use the PCSA-B768S ISDN unit  
and connect 4-6 ISDN lines, the D1-F2  
text boxes are shown in pages 3 and 7 of  
the ISDN Setup menu. Fill in the boxes  
following steps 3 and 4.  
• If you use the PCSA-PRI ISDN unit,  
Ch1 to Ch23 (T1), or Ch1 to Ch30 (E1)  
are displayed. Enter the telephone  
numbers according to the number of  
channels you will use.  
The SPID is generally comprised of 12  
digits, including a 7 digit LDN (Local  
Directory Number). Be sure to enter the  
different SPID number in each of the A1  
and A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending  
on the number of lines you use) text boxes  
if you have entered the separate LDNs in  
the Local Number text boxes for each  
channel in step 3.  
For the AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN)  
and AT&T 5ESS (Multipoint Custom  
ISDN) switch type  
5 After the settings are completed,  
select “Save”, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
66 Registering Local Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option I/F  
Information Menu  
Displays the optional connected equipment.  
None: No optional equipment is connected.  
ISDN UNIT: The PCSA-B384S, PCSA-  
B768S or PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit is  
connected.  
The Information menu shows the versions of  
the Communication Terminal and the  
connected equipment for exclusive use,  
installed software versions, etc.  
DSB: The PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box  
is connected.  
Information  
Whiteboard: A whiteboard is connected.  
Ver X.XX  
Host Version  
ISDN UNIT Version  
USB Version  
DSP Version  
Software Option  
Option I/F  
Ver X.XX  
Host Name  
Displays the host name.  
Ver X.XX  
Ver X.XX  
Multipoint(H.320+H.323)  
DSB, ISDN UNIT  
PCS-G70  
IP Address  
Displays the IP address.  
Host Name  
0. 0. 0.  
0
IP Address  
MAC Address  
00-00-00-00-00-00-00  
MAC Address  
Displays the MAC address.  
End  
Serial Number  
12345  
Serial Number  
Host Version  
Displays the serial number.  
Displays the software version of the  
Communication Terminal.  
ISDN UNIT Version  
Displays the version of the connected  
PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S or PCSA-PRI  
ISDN Unit.  
DSB Version  
Displays the version of the connected  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box.  
DSP Version  
Displays the version of the built-in DSP  
(Digital Signal Processor) for audio/video  
codec.  
Software Option  
Displays the optional MCU software  
installed.  
None: No MCU software is installed.  
Multipoint (H.323): The PCSA-M3G70  
H.323 MCU software (for LAN) is  
installed.  
Multipoint (H.320): The PCSA-M0G70  
H.320 MCU software (for ISDN) is  
installed.  
Multipoint (H.320 + H.323): Both the  
PCSA-M0G70 and PCSA-M3G70  
MCU software are installed.  
Registering Local Information 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The List Edit screen appears.  
Registering a  
Remote Party –  
Phone Book  
List Edit  
IP  
Index  
Line I/F  
IP  
You can register the telephone number or IP  
address of a remote party in the Phone Book,  
allowing you to dial the party very easily.  
Up to 500 remote parties can be registered in  
the Phone Book. You can also store a still  
image such as a participant’s portrait in the  
index list.  
You can also create a Private Phone Book on  
a “Memory Stick” separately from the  
Phone Book in the Communication  
Terminal.  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
3 Enter the name of a remote party in the  
Index text box.  
For character input, see “Entering  
Characters” on page 41.  
4 Select the line interface you are using  
to connect to a remote party with  
“Line I/F”.  
Registering a New Remote  
Party  
IP: Connects to a videoconferencing  
system on the remote site via a LAN.  
ISDN: Connects to a videoconferencing  
system on the remote site via an ISDN  
line.  
ISDN (Telephone): Connects to a  
phone on the remote site via an ISDN  
line for a voice meeting.  
1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select “Phone  
Book” in the launcher menu, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The Phone Book opens.  
Multipoint: Connects to multipoints for  
a multipoint videoconference via  
LAN and ISDN.  
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
J-S  
T-Z  
The List Edit menu switches according  
to the selected line interface.  
Recent  
New Entry  
5 Set up various items for the line on a  
remote site.  
Cancel  
When “IP” is selected in step 4  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select “New  
Entry”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
List Edit  
IP  
Index Bob  
Line I/F  
IP  
Number of Lines  
1024Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
68 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1 Enter the IP address of the remote  
party.  
6 Select the icon or a still image stored  
on a “Memory Stick” to be registered  
in the Phone Book.  
name when using the DNS server  
(ex. host.domain). When using the  
gatekeeper, enter the user name and  
user number registered in the LAN  
Setup menu (page 59).  
2 Select the LAN bandwidth to be  
used.  
Press the B or b button to select the icon  
or a still image, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
When “ISDN” or “ISDN  
(Telephone)” is selected in step 4  
List Edit  
A1  
Note  
You cannot select a still image unless a  
“Memory Stick” in which the still image is  
stored is inserted.  
Index Bob  
Line I/F  
ISDN  
Number of Lines  
6B (384K)  
7 Use the V, v, B or b button to select  
“Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
Save  
Cancel  
The settings are registered in the Phone  
Book.  
1 Enter the telephone number of the  
remote party in the telephone  
number text box beside “A”.  
When entering a sub-address,  
enter an asterisk (*) between the  
telephone number and sub-  
To connect to the remote party  
without using bonding  
If the videoconferencing system of the  
remote party is not equipped with the  
bonding function, entering one telephone  
number does not allow you to connect all the  
line numbers used to connect to the remote  
party. To connect to the remote party by  
entering all the ISDN line numbers used,  
you can set the connection without using the  
bonding function of this system.  
Set “More Options Enable” to “On” in the  
Dial Setup menu (page 44), select the More  
Options button at the lower part of the List  
Edit menu to open the Dial Setup menu, then  
set “Bonding” to “Auto”. The A1, A2, B1,  
B2, C1 and C2 text boxes appear in the List  
Edit menu. Enter all the telephone numbers  
for the ISDN lines selected by “Number of  
Lines”. Up to 6B-channel connection is  
available when using this method.  
address. Only numbers are usable  
for a sub-address.  
When “More Options Enable” is  
set to “On” in the Dial Setup menu  
(page 44), the A1, A2, B1, B2, C1  
and C2 text boxes appear. Enter  
the number of the remote party in  
the A1 text box.  
2 Select the number of the ISDN  
channels to be used for dialing.  
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
Changing the Contents of the  
Phone Book  
When you set “Number of Lines” to “2B”, you  
can connect to the remote party by selecting  
“ISDN (2B)” from “Line I/F” in the Detail  
Dial menu.  
You can change the telephone number, IP  
address, name or setting registered in the  
Phone Book.  
To set up more detailed options  
1 Open the Phone Book menu.  
When “More Options Enable” is set to “On”  
in the Dial Setup menu, the More Options  
button is shown at the lower part of the List  
Edit menu.  
Select the More Options button with the V,  
v, B or b button on the Remote Commander  
and press the PUSH ENTER button to open  
a menu for more detailed dial settings. You  
can change the settings of the desired items.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select the  
remote party to be changed in the  
Phone Book menu, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
The submenu appears.  
Dial  
Note  
Edit  
The contents set with the More Options button  
have priority over those set in the Detail Dial  
Setup menu.  
Copy  
Delete  
Cancel  
3 Press the V or v button on the Remote  
Commander to select “Edit”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The List Edit menu appears.  
4 Change the telephone number, IP  
address, name or setting.  
5 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select “Save”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The correction is completed.  
70 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying the Setting of the  
Phone Book Menu  
Deleting the Registered  
Remote Party  
Follow the procedure below to delete the  
remote party from the Phone Book.  
1 Open the Phone Book menu.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select the  
remote party to be copied in the Phone  
Book menu, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
1 Open the Phone Book menu.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select the  
remote party to be deleted in the  
Phone Book menu, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
The submenu appears.  
3 Press the V or v button on the Remote  
Commander to select “Copy”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The submenu appears.  
3 Press the V or v button on the Remote  
Commander to select “Delete”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The items for the selected party are  
copied, and the file name is followed by  
“–2”. You can use the setting after  
modifying the necessary items.  
The message “Delete Entry?” appears.  
4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select “OK”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The selected party is deleted.  
To cancel deleting  
Select “Cancel” in step 4, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
Creating a Private Phone  
Book  
You can create your own Phone Book  
(Private Phone Book) on a “Memory Stick”.  
Once the Private Phone Book is registered,  
inserting the “Memory Stick” into the  
Communication Terminal changes the  
Phone Book menu to the Private Phone  
Book menu. You can also activate the Auto  
Dial feature, allowing you to start dialing  
automatically to one of the lists simply by  
inserting the “Memory Stick”.  
To register a new remote party in a  
Private Phone Book  
1 Insert a “Memory Stick” in which you  
want to register a remote party into the  
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Memory Stick slot on the  
Communication Terminal.  
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the  
direction of the arrow with the mark  
facing upward.  
To copy all the contents of the  
Phone Book to the Private Phone  
Book  
Insert the “Memory Stick” in which you  
want to store the Private Phone Book into  
the Memory Stick slot on the  
Communication Terminal, then select  
“Copy to Private Phone Book” from the  
“Private Phone Book” of the Administrator  
Setup menu. All the data registered in the  
Phone Book are copied to the inserted  
“Memory Stick”.  
To delete the Private Phone Book  
from the “Memory Stick”  
2 Open “Private Phone Book” of the  
Administrator Setup menu.  
Insert the “Memory Stick” from which you  
want to delete the registered Private Phone  
Book into the Memory Stick slot on the  
Communication Terminal, then select  
“Delete Private Phone Book” from the  
“Private Phone Book” of the Administrator  
Setup menu. All the data are deleted from  
the inserted “Memory Stick”.  
Administrator  
Private Phone Book  
Page:  
2/2  
Auto Dialing  
Create Private Phone Book  
On  
Delete Private Phone Book  
Copy Private Phone Book  
To dial a specified list in a Private  
Phone Book automatically  
Save  
Cancel  
If you set “Auto Dial” in the “Private Phone  
Book” of the Administrator Setup menu to  
“On”, you can automatically dial one of the  
lists registered in the Private Phone Book  
simply by inserting the “Memory Stick” in  
which the Private Phone Book is registered.  
For how to open the menu, see “Registering  
Local Information” on page 43.  
3 Select “Create Private Phone Book”.  
An empty folder and file for a Private  
Phone Book are created in the “Memory  
Stick”.  
1 Open the Private Phone Book.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select the  
remote party to dial automatically,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
4 Register a new remote party.  
The procedure is the same as that for  
registering in the Phone Book. Proceed  
with steps 2 to 7 in “Registering a New  
Remote Party” on page 68.  
The procedures for how to change the  
contents of the Private Phone Book, how to  
delete the registered remote party, or how to  
copy the setting of the Private Phone Book  
are the same as those for the Phone Book.  
Open the Private Phone Book menu and  
proceed with the steps described on page 70.  
72 Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press the V or v button on the Remote  
Commander to select “Edit”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The List Edit menu appears.  
List Edit  
IP  
192.168.159.247  
Auto Dial  
Index Jane  
Line I/F  
IP  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select “Auto  
Dial”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
5 Use the V, v, B or b button on the  
Remote Commander to select “Save”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The setting is registered and “AUTO”  
appears on the registered list.  
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
AUTO  
Jane  
J-S  
T-Z  
Mary  
Recent  
New Entry  
Cancel  
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Daily  
Videoconference  
This chapter describes how to conduct a videoconference from start to finish  
after the administrator has completed various registrations and settings for the  
system.  
The videoconference explained here is a point-to-point conference via a LAN  
connection or ISDN connection using the optional PCSA-B384S, PCSA-  
B768S, or PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit.  
For use of a “Memory Stick” or optional equipment, see chapter 4. To conduct  
a data conference using the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box, see  
chapter 5. To conduct an encrypted conference via LAN, see chapter 7. To  
conduct a multipoint conference, see chapter 8.  
Starting a Conference by Calling a  
Remote Party  
You can start a videoconference with a remote party by dialing. Once you have  
made a connection to the remote party, you can begin talking just as with a  
normal phone call and start a videoconference.  
Turning on the Power  
1 Turn on the TV monitor.  
When the IR repeater is inserted under the remote sensor of the Sony TV, set  
the TV to standby mode. When the power of the Communication Terminal is  
turned on, the TV monitor will turn on simultaneously.  
2 Turn on other equipment you are using for the videoconference.  
74 Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Open the front panel of the Communication Terminal, and then slide the  
power switch on the right to the on position (@).  
The Communication Terminal turns on after a while.  
POWER indicators (Lights green)  
Power switch  
Three indicators on the front of the Communication Terminal and the POWER  
indicator on the camera light, then only the POWER indicators on both units  
remain on in green. The launcher menu will appear on the monitor screen and  
the picture shot by the local camera will also appear in the launcher menu.  
Note  
After the power is turned on, the camera moves automatically for trial operation. Be  
careful not to catch your finger.  
Using the Launcher Menu  
The launcher menu is displayed on the monitor screen when the system is  
turned on or while it is not connected to a remote party. The launcher menu  
displays the image shot by the local camera, local system status and buttons to  
open the menus.  
Phone Book  
Detail Dial  
Tokyo  
History  
New York  
Menu  
IP:  
ISDN:  
012.345.678.678  
012345678956789  
Information  
Paris  
AUTO  
Dial  
Enter the remote party number.  
Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1 Screen  
The image shot by the local camera is displayed.  
2 Direct Phone Book button  
The Direct Phone Book function is selected when you select this button by  
pressing the V, v, B or b, and then the PUSH ENTER button of the Remote  
Commander. This starts calling the selected remote party.  
3 Line I/F  
Select this button by pressing the V, v, B or b button, and then the PUSH  
ENTER button on the Remote Commander. Items to be set are displayed.  
Allows you to select the type of line to be used.  
4 Phone Book button  
The Phone Book is displayed when you select this button by pressing the V, v,  
B or b button and then the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.  
5 Detail Dial button  
The Detail Dial appears when you select this button by pressing the V, v, B or  
b button, and then the PUSH ENTER button of the Remote Commander.  
6 History button  
The History appears when you select this button by pressing the V, v, B or b  
button, and then the PUSH ENTER button of the Remote Commander.  
7 Menu button  
You can display the various Setup menus when you select this button by  
pressing the V, v, B or b button and then the PUSH ENTER button on the  
Remote Commander.  
8 Information button  
The Information menu appears when you select this button by pressing the V,  
v, B or b, and then the PUSH ENTER button of the Remote Commander.  
Phone Book  
Information  
il Dial  
Tokyo  
PORT  
ry  
IP: 012.345.678.912  
Video: Object  
ISDN: 012345678912  
Audio: MIC(INT)+AUX  
New York  
u  
OK  
ISDN:  
012345678956789  
ation  
Paris  
AUTO  
Dial  
The following icons or text are displayed in accordance with the system  
configuration.  
Indicator Identification Description  
(icon)  
LAN status The indicator is shown in dark when the LAN is  
enabled to use, and in light when it is disabled.  
Multipoint  
mode  
MCU software for multipoint videoconference is  
installed.  
Memory  
Stick  
“Memory Stick” is inserted.  
76 Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Indicator Identification Description  
(icon)  
ISDN status When the optional ISDN Unit is connected, usable  
ISDN port is shown.  
IP:  
IP address  
Shows the IP address of the local system.  
ISDN:  
ISDN  
telephone  
number  
Shows the ISDN telephone number of the local  
system.  
Video:  
Video input The selected video input on the local system is shown.  
Main: Video from the main camera.  
Sub: Video from the secondary camera.  
IR1: Video from the optional PCS-DS150/DS150P  
Document Stand.  
IR2: Video from the optional PCS-DS150/DS150P  
Document Stand.  
AUX1: Video from the device connected to the MAIN  
AUX IN connector.  
AUX2: Video from the device connected to the SUB  
AUX IN connector.  
Note  
The video inputs are shown as the labels set in the “Custom  
Input Label” of the Video Setup menu (page 52).  
Audio:  
Audio input The selected audio input on the local system is shown.  
MIC (EXT): Sound from an external microphone  
connected to the Communication Terminal.  
MIC (DSB): Sound from an external microphone  
connected to the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data  
Solution Box.  
MIC (AUX): Sound from an external microphone  
connected to the AUX IN jack on the optional  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box.  
AUX: Sound from external equipment connected to  
the AUDIO IN jack on the Communication  
Terminal.  
MIC (EXT)+AUX: Mixed sounds from an external  
microphone connected to the Communication  
Terminal and from external equipment.  
MIC (DSB)+AUX: Mixed sounds from an external  
microphone connected to the optional PCSA-  
DSB1S Data Solution Box and from external  
equipment.  
MIC (AUX)+AUX: Mixed sounds from an external  
microphone connected to the AUX IN jack on the  
optional PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box and  
from external equipment.  
CTE (LINE): Sound from the CTE-600  
Communication Transducer connected to the  
AUDIO IN jack on the Communication Terminal.  
CTE (DSB): Sound from the CTE-600  
Communication Transducer connected to the  
AUX IN jack on the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data  
Solution Box.  
Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 Dial button  
Select this button by pressing the V, v, B or b button, and then the PUSH  
ENTER button on the Remote Commander. This starts calling the remote party  
whose dial number is entered in the number input box.  
0 Number input box  
To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book, select this box by  
pressing the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander, and then enter  
the IP address or the ISDN line number.  
Calling a Remote Party  
To call a remote party by entering their number directly  
Phone Book  
Detail Dial  
Tokyo  
History  
New York  
Menu  
IP:  
012.345.678.678  
Information  
ISDN: 012345678956789  
Paris  
AUTO  
Dial  
Enter the remote party number.  
Line type  
Number text box  
Dial  
1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select Line I/  
Ffrom the launcher menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Or press  
the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
Commander.  
/
) button on the Remote  
2 Use the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select the type of line  
to be used, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
AUTO: A line for connecting is automatically selected, based on the number  
entered in the number text box.  
IP: Connects to a videoconferencing system on the remote site via a LAN.  
ISDN: Connects to a videoconferencing system on the remote site via an ISDN  
line.  
TEL: Connects to a phone on the remote site via an ISDN line for a voice  
meeting.  
3 Press the V, v, B or b button of the Remote Commander to select the  
number input field, and then the PUSH ENTER button.  
4 Enter the remote party's IP address or line number.  
78 Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Press the V, v, B or b button to select “Dial”, and then press the PUSH  
ENTER button of the Remote Commander. Or press the CONNECT/  
DISCONNECT (  
/
) button on the Remote Commander.  
The system begins dialing the IP address ISDN telephone number entered in  
step 4. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator  
(blue) on the Communication Terminal blinks.  
When the system connects to the remote system, the message “Meeting starts!”  
appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops blinking and lights in  
blue.  
Note  
When “More Options Enable” in the Dial Setup menu is set to “On”, a dialog box  
More Options Enable: The Detail Dial menu is displayed.  
Dial: Call the remote party.  
Cancel: Cancel a call.  
For details about the Detail Dial menu, See “To call a remote party not  
registered in the Phone Book“ on this page.  
6 Press the V, v, B or b button to select “Dial”, and then press the PUSH  
ENTER button of the Remote Commander.  
To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book  
1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Detail  
Dial”, then press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/  
DISCONNECT (  
/
) button on the Remote Commander.  
The Detail Dial menu appears on the screen.  
Detail Dial  
Line I/F  
IP  
IP  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Dial  
Save  
Cancel  
Note  
Pressing the number buttons on the Remote Commander opens the Detail Dial  
menu, allowing direct entry of the IP address or the ISDN telephone number with  
the number buttons.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Line I/F”, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button. The submenu appears. Press the V or v button to select the  
line type to be used to connect to the remote party, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Detail Dial  
Line I/F  
IP  
IP  
ISDN  
ISDN(2B)  
ISDN (Telephone)  
Multipoint  
Dial  
Save  
Cancel  
IP: Connects to the videoconferencing system of a remote party via a LAN.  
ISDN: Connects to the videoconferencing system of a remote party via an  
ISDN.  
ISDN (2B): Connects to the H.221-format videoconferencing system via 2B  
channels of the ISDN connection.  
ISDN (Telephone): Connects to the phone of a remote party to conduct a voice  
meeting via the ISDN connection.  
Multipoint: Connects to the videoconferencing system of a remote party via a  
LAN and ISDN.  
3 Configure the LAN, or ISDN line.  
When using the LAN  
Detail Dial  
Line I/F  
IP  
IP  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Dial  
Save  
Cancel  
1 Enter the IP address of a remote party to connect in the IP text box.  
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the IP text  
box, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Then enter the IP address with  
the number buttons on the Remote Commander. Enter the host name and  
domain name when using the DNS server in the IP text box (ex.  
host.domain). When using the gatekeeper, enter the user name and user  
number registered in the LAN Setup menu (page 60).  
Notes  
• You can enter a dot (.) with the b or  
button on the Remote Commander.  
• To correct the entered number, press the PinP (BACK SPACE) button on the  
Remote Commander. The last entered number is deleted.  
• To delete the entered IP address, press the DISPLAY (CLEAR) button on the  
Remote Commander.  
80 Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select the LAN bandwidth.  
Use the V, v, B or b button to select “LAN Bandwidth”, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button. Press the V or v button to select the bandwidth from  
the displayed submenu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
When using the ISDN  
Detail Dial  
Line I/F  
A
ISDN  
Number of Lines  
6B(384K)  
Dial  
Save  
Cancel  
1
Enter the telephone number of a remote party to connect to in the A text box.  
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the A text  
box, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Then enter the telephone number  
with the number buttons on the Remote Commander.  
Notes  
• Do not enter the prefix number in the telephone number text box, when the prefix  
setting is on.  
• For details on prefix settings, see “Dial Setup Menu” on page 44.  
• Even when you connect multiple ISDN lines (2B or more number of lines),  
entering one telephone number of the remote party enables you to connect all the  
lines used automatically.  
• When you select ISDN (2B (128K)), the A1 and A2 text boxes appear. You can  
enter a separate ISDN line number in each text box. When you enter the number  
in the A2 text box, pressing the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander  
enables copy of the content of the A1 text box to A2.  
• To correct the entered number, press the PinP (BACK SPACE) button on the  
Remote Commander. The last entered number is deleted.  
• To delete the entered ISDN telephone number, press the DISPLAY (CLEAR)  
button on the Remote Commander.  
2 Select the number of channels connected when setting up a call.  
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Number  
of Lines”, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Press the V or v button to  
select the number of channels to be used when calling a remote party from  
the displayed submenu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
To connect to the remote party by entering all the telephone numbers for the  
ISDN lines used  
If the videoconferencing system of the remote party is not equipped with the  
bonding function, entering one remote party’s telephone number does not allow  
automatic connection of multiple ISDN lines used to connect to the remote party.  
To connect to the remote party by entering all the telephone numbers, register the  
remote party’s telephone numbers for the ISDN lines to be used referring to  
“Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” in chapter 2 (page 68), then connect to  
the remote party according to the procedure described in “To call a remote party  
registered in the Phone Book” (page 84).  
4 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Dial” in the lower part of the menu,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/  
DISCONNECT (  
/
) button on the Remote Commander.  
The system begins dialing the IP address or ISDN telephone number entered in  
step 3. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator  
(blue) on the Communication Terminal blinks.  
When the system connects to the remote system, the message “Meeting starts!”  
appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops blinking and lights in  
blue.  
Now you can start a videoconference.  
Picture on the local site  
Picture on the remote site  
Meeting starts!  
To cancel dialing before connecting  
Press the V, v, B or b button to select “Cancel”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
/
) button.  
To save the entered IP address or ISDN line number in the Phone  
Book  
Select “Save” with the V, v, B or b button, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button on the Remote Commander. The address or number you entered is  
saved in the Phone Book and the List Edit menu is displayed.  
For details on the List Edit menu, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone  
Book” on page 68.  
82 Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Redial function  
Once you have input the IP address or ISDN line number using the Detail Dial  
menu, it will be entered in the text box of the Detail Dial menu the next time  
you open the menu.  
Note  
The redial function is not available:  
• Once you have turned off the power of the system or set it to standby mode.  
• When you cancel dialing the entered IP address or ISDN telephone number.  
• When you open the Detail Dial menu by pressing the number buttons on the Remote  
Commander.  
To call a remote party with the Direct Phone Book button in launcher menu  
1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select Line I/  
Ffrom the launcher menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Or press  
the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
Commander.  
/
) button on the Remote  
2 Use the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select the type of line  
to be used, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
AUTO: A line for connecting is automatically selected, based on the number  
entered in the number text box.  
IP: Connects to a videoconferencing system on the remote site via a LAN.  
ISDN: Connects to a videoconferencing system on the remote site via an ISDN  
line.  
TEL: Connects to a phone on the remote site via an ISDN line for a voice  
meeting.  
3 Press the V, v, B or b button to select the Direct Phone Book of the remote  
party that you want to call, and then the PUSH ENTER button of the  
“Dial” appears.  
If “More Options Enable” in the Dial Setup menu is set to “On”, you can select the  
“Details” button. When you do, the Detail Dial menu appears.  
For details about the Detail Dial menu, see “To call a remote party not  
registered in the Phone Book” on page 79.  
4 Press the V, v, B or b button to select “Dial”, and then press the PUSH  
ENTER button of the Remote Commander.  
Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To call a remote party by selecting them in the history list  
1 Press the V, v, B or b button to select “History”, and then the PUSH  
ENTER button of the Remote Commander.  
The History menu appears.  
History  
Tokyo  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
2004. 04. 04 10:20  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
New York  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
Paris  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
Osaka  
LAN 012.345.678.912  
Cancel  
2 Press the V or v button to select the desired remote party, and then a  
submenu appears.  
3 Press the V, v, B or b button to select “Dial”, and then press the PUSH  
ENTER button of the Remote Commander.  
To set up more detailed options  
When “More Options Enable” is set to “On” in the Dial Setup menu, a dialog  
box is displayed.  
Select the More Options button with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote  
Commander and press the PUSH ENTER button to open the Detail Dial menu. You  
can change the settings of the desired items.  
To call a remote party registered in the Phone Book  
1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Phone  
Book” in the launcher menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The Phone Book appears on the monitor screen.  
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
AUTO  
Jane  
J-S  
T-Z  
Mary  
Recent  
New Entry  
Cancel  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a remote  
party from the Phone Book, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
84 Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The submenu appears.  
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
J-S  
T-Z  
AUTO  
Dial  
Jane  
Mary  
Edit  
Copy  
Cancel  
New Entry  
Cancel  
If the desired remote party does not appear, see “To search for a remote  
party in the Phone Book” on page 86.  
3 Use the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Dial”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT  
(
/
) button on the Remote Commander.  
The system begins dialing the party selected in step 2. “Dialing” appears on the  
monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator (blue) on the Communication  
Terminal blinks.  
When the system connects to the system on the remote site, the message  
“Meeting starts!” appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops  
blinking and lights in blue.  
Now you can start the videoconference.  
Picture on the local site  
Picture on the remote site  
Meeting starts!  
To cancel dialing before connecting  
Press the V, v, B or b button to select “Cancel”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
Remote Commander.  
/
) button on the  
To call a remote party registered in the Private Phone Book  
1 Insert a “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone Book is registered into  
the Memory Stick slot on the Communication Terminal.  
Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Phone Book menu changes to the Private Phone Book menu.  
Private Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
AUTO  
Jane  
J-S  
T-Z  
Mary  
Recent  
New Entry  
Cancel  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a remote  
party you want to call from the Private Phone Book, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
3 Select “Dial” from the submenu and press the PUSH ENTER button, or  
press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
Commander.  
/
) button on the Remote  
The system dials the selected remote party.  
Note  
If the auto dialing feature of the Private Phone Book is activated, the system begins  
dialing when the “Memory Stick” is inserted.  
To search for a remote party in the Phone Book  
The Phone Book displays the list of the six parties at a time.  
When you select “Recent”, the Phone Book lists the six names you have most  
recently dialed.  
Selecting the “0-9”, “A-I”, “J-S” or “T-Z” tab opens the submenu. When you  
select the desired number or letter from the corresponding submenu, the Phone  
Book lists the six party names which start with the selected number or letter.  
Phone Book  
0
1
0-9  
A-1  
2
AUTO  
J-S  
T-Z  
3
4
5
6
Jane  
Mary  
7
Rece
8
New ntry  
9
Cancel  
Note  
You can also search for remote parties by pressing the number buttons on the Remote  
Commander instead of the “0-9” tab on the Phone Book. Pressing the number button  
lists the six party names which start with the alphabetical letter on the number button of  
the Remote Commander.  
86 Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party  
Operations for answering a call differ depending on the setting of the answer  
mode.  
Auto answer mode  
The system automatically receives a call from a remote party and you can start  
conferencing. Although no operation is necessary to start, the picture on the  
local site will be displayed on the remote site screen even if you are not ready  
to begin.  
Manual answer mode  
When there is an incoming call, the Communication Terminal rings. You need  
to connect the call manually before starting the conference.  
You can start it whenever you are ready.  
Notes  
• You cannot answer the call unless the power switch on the Communication Terminal  
is set to on (@).  
• Make sure that the TV monitor is turned on. If you insert the IR repeater under the  
remote sensor on the Sony TV, set the TV to standby mode.  
For setting of the answer mode, see “Auto Answer” in the Answer Setup menu  
on page 46.  
Answering a Call from a Remote Party  
To answer a call in auto answer mode  
When you receive a call, the Communication Terminal rings and the message  
“Incoming Call” appears on the monitor screen. The system is automatically  
connected and the picture of the remote party is displayed on the local monitor  
screen and the sound is heard. The picture and sound on the local site will be  
enabled on the remote site at the same time.  
The message “Meeting starts!” appears on the monitor screen.  
You are now ready to start a conference.  
Picture on the local site  
Picture on the remote site  
Meeting starts!  
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note  
See pages 90 to 104 to adjust the sound and picture during the conference.  
To receive a call in manual answer mode  
When you receive a call, the Communication Terminal rings and the message  
“Incoming call. Answer?” appears on the monitor screen.  
Press B or b to select “OK”, then press the PUSH ENTER button. The system  
is then connected. Once the connection is made, the picture of the remote party  
is displayed on the local monitor screen and the sound is heard. The picture and  
sound on the local site will be enabled on the remote site at the same time.  
The message “Meeting starts!” appears on the monitor screen.  
You are now ready to start a conference.  
Note  
See pages 90 to 104 to adjust the sound and picture during the conference.  
When you do not want to answer the call  
Press B or b to select “Cancel”, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Ringing  
stops.  
When the system fails to make an ISDN connection  
If the system fails to connect to the remote party, the message “Cannot  
complete connection (an ISDN cause code and a message are displayed here)”  
appears on the monitor screen.  
For details on ISDN cause codes and messages, see “On-screen Messages” on  
page 200.  
When there is an incoming call during communication over a different line  
interface  
If you receive a call via an ISDN when you are in communication via a LAN  
(or vice versa), the system becomes busy.  
To display the elapsed communication time  
You can display the elapsed communication time on the monitor screen if  
“Time Display” in the General Setup menu is set to “On”.  
To turn the indicator off, set “Time Display” in the General Setup menu to  
“Off”. You can also turn off the indicator during communication with a remote  
party by turning it off in the communication submenu.  
For “Time Display” setting, see “General Setup Menu” on page 53.  
88 Receiving a Call from a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ending the Conference  
1 Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
/
) button on the Remote  
Commander.  
The message “Disconnect?” appears on the monitor screen.  
2 Press the B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT  
(
/
) button on the Remote Commander again.  
The system is disconnected.  
Note  
The power of the Communication Terminal remains on even if the system is  
disconnected.  
To cancel disconnection of the system  
Select “Cancel” with the B or b button, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
To register the connected remote party in the Phone Book  
You can easily register the remote party who has just disconnected.  
If you set “Last Number Registration” in the General Setup menu to “On”, the  
message “Register this participant in the list?” appears after a conference with  
an unregistered remote party is finished. When you select “OK”, the Edit List  
Note  
If the “Last Number Registration” is set to “Off”, the message does not appear.  
For “Last Number Registration” setting, see “Last Number Registration” on  
page 54.  
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjusting the Sound  
Adjusting the Volume  
You can adjust the volume of the sound to be received from a remote party.  
Press the VOLUME + button on the Remote Commander to increase the  
volume, VOLUME – button to decrease it. The volume level indicator appears  
on the monitor screen. The indicator will automatically disappear if you do not  
operate the buttons for a certain time.  
Notes  
• You need to set the volume of the TV monitor to an appropriate level first.  
• If feedback caused by increasing the volume occurs, decrease the volume.  
Turning Off the Sound Momentarily – Muting Function  
You can momentarily turn off the sound to be sent to the remote party.  
Press the MIC ON/OFF button on the Remote Commander.  
The sound of the local party is not heard by the remote party. The “MIC OFF”  
indicator appears on the monitor screen.  
MIC  
OFF  
To restore the sound  
Press the MIC ON/OFF button again.  
The “MIC OFF” indicator disappears and the sound is heard by the remote  
party.  
90 Adjusting the Sound  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning Off the Sound On Answering – Mic on Answer Function  
You can turn off the sound to be sent to a remote party when you have  
answered a call from the remote party.  
If you set “Mic on Answer” to “Off” in the Answer Setup menu, only the  
picture on the local party will be sent to the remote party when answering a  
call. The “MIC OFF” indicator appears on the monitor screen.  
To send the sound to the remote party  
Press the MIC ON/OFF button on the Remote Commander.  
Synchronizing Audio and Video – Lip Sync Function  
During the conference a time lag may occur between the sound and picture to  
be sent to the remote party.  
When you set “Lip Sync” to “On” in the Audio Setup menu, the system adjusts  
to synchronize audio and video. However, this may delay transmission of  
audio synchronized with video.  
For the Lip Sync setting, see “Audio Setup Menu” on page 50.  
Note  
To enable the Lip Sync function of the remote party, you have to ask them to do so.  
Reducing Echo – Echo Canceler  
The Communication Terminal is equipped with the Echo Canceler, allowing  
the echo that occurs during audio transmission to be reduced.  
Setting “Echo Canceler” to “Internal” in the Audio Setup menu activates the  
built-in echo canceler. If you set it to “External”, you can activate the eco  
canceler of the equipment connected to the system.  
For the “Echo Canceler” setting, see “Audio Setup Menu” on page 50.  
Adjusting the Sound 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adjusting the Camera  
You can adjust the image shot by the local camera that is sent to the remote  
party to obtain the desired angle and size.  
During communication you can also control the camera on the remote site to  
adjust the image shot by the remote camera.  
Selecting the Camera to be Controlled  
Before adjustment, choose whether you control the local or remote camera.  
1 Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.  
The Display Control menu appears.  
2 Press the B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Control”,  
then switch between “Far” and “Near” with the V or v button.  
Display Control  
Display  
Far  
Control  
Near  
Camera  
3 Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.  
When “Far” is selected (the remote camera is selected), the FAR indicator is  
displayed.  
When “Near” is selected (the local camera is selected), the FAR indicator does  
not appear.  
Notes  
• To control the remote camera, set “Far End Camera Control” to “On” in the  
Communication Setup menu. If this setting is not configured properly, you will  
not be able to control the remote camera.  
• You cannot control the remote camera during a session if the remote control  
format of the remote camera is not H.281. If you cannot control the remote  
camera, ask the remote party about the remote control format of his camera.  
• If the local and remote parties try to control the same camera at the same time, the  
camera may not operate correctly.  
92 Adjusting the Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adjusting the Camera Angle and Zoom  
Determine the angle of view and the size of the picture to be displayed on the  
monitor screen by adjusting the angle and zoom.  
You can make adjustments in the monitor screen during communication and  
in the launcher menu when not in communication. You can also make  
adjustments using the Camera menu.  
To make adjustments during communication  
1 Select the camera you want to adjust.  
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander to open the Display  
Control menu, then select “Far” or “Near” under “Control”.  
2 Press the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle.  
The picture whose camera angle is adjusted is displayed in the small window  
or in full screen.  
Adjusted picture  
3 Use the ZOOM button to zoom in or out.  
Press the ZOOM T (Telephoto) button to zoom in (to enlarge image), and the  
ZOOM W (Wide angle) button to zoom out (to obtain wider range of image).  
To make adjustments using the launcher menu while not in communication  
You can adjust the camera angle and zoom of the picture on the local site only.  
1 Use the V, v, B or b button to select the screen (screen frame becomes  
yellow), then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Adjusting the Camera 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The color of the screen frame changes, then you can adjust the camera angle  
and zoom.  
Phone Book  
Detail Dial  
Tokyo  
History  
New York  
Menu  
IP:  
012.345.678.678  
Information  
ISDN: 012345678956789  
Paris  
AUTO  
Dial  
Enter the remote party number.  
2 Press the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle so that the desired  
angle of view is obtained.  
3 Use the ZOOM button to zoom in or out.  
Press the ZOOM T button to zoom in (to enlarge image), and the ZOOM W  
button to zoom out (to obtain wider range of image).  
4 Press the PUSH ENTER button.  
To make adjustments using the Camera menu  
1 Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup  
menu, then press the V or v button to select  
(camera) icon.  
The Camera menu appears.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Adjustments”, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
The color of the screen frame changes, then you can adjust the camera angle  
and zoom.  
Camera  
Preset Save  
Preset Load  
Adjustments  
Use the following Remote Commander  
buttons to adjust the camera.  
0
:
:
Auto adjustment On.  
:
Focus+.  
Backlight On/Off.  
Brightness.  
:
Focus–  
8
7
9
:
3 While in communication, press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote  
Commander to select the camera to be adjusted.  
When the remote camera is selected, the FAR indicator is displayed.  
94 Adjusting the Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Press the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle so that the desired  
angle of view is obtained.  
5 Use the ZOOM button to zoom in or out.  
Press the ZOOM T button to zoom in (to enlarge image), and the ZOOM W  
button to zoom out (to obtain wider range of image).  
6 Press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Adjusting the Focus and Brightness  
Normally, the focus and brightness are automatically adjusted to obtain  
optimum levels. You can also adjust them manually.  
It is recommended that the focus and brightness be adjusted automatically.  
To set the system to camera adjustment mode  
1 Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup  
menu, then press the V or v button to select the  
(camera) icon.  
The Camera menu appears.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Adjustments”, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
The color of the screen frame changes, then you can adjust the camera angle  
and zoom.  
The guidance for operations will be displayed under the screen.  
Camera  
Preset Save  
Preset Load  
Adjustments  
Use the following Remote Commander  
buttons to adjust the camera.  
0
:
Auto adjustment On.  
:
:
Focus+.  
Brightness.  
:
Focus–  
7
8
9
:
Backlight On/Off.  
3 While in communication, press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote  
Commander to select the camera to be adjusted.  
When the remote camera is selected, the FAR indicator is displayed.  
Note  
When the remote camera is selected, only manual focus adjustment is available.  
Adjusting the Camera 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To display the picture to fill the monitor screen  
To display the picture in full screen while the Camera menu is displayed, select  
“Adjustments”, then press the PinP button on the Remote Commander. To  
cancel the full screen mode, press the RETURN button or PinP button on the  
Remote Commander.  
To adjust the focus automatically  
Press the number button 0 on the Remote Commander.  
The “Auto Camera” indicator appears and the focus is automatically adjusted.  
To adjust the focus manually  
Press the button on the Remote Commander repeatedly to move the focus  
point further away from the camera. The “Focus Far” indicator is displayed.  
Press the button on the Remote Commander repeatedly to move the focus  
point closer to the camera. The “Focus Near” indicator is displayed.  
To adjust the brightness  
Press the number button 9 on the Remote Commander repeatedly to make the  
picture brighter. The “Brightness +” indicator is displayed.  
Press the “7” button on the Remote Commander repeatedly to make the picture  
darker. The “Brightness –” indicator is displayed.  
To shoot the picture with backlight compensation  
Use backlight compensation when shooting a subject with bright background.  
Each time you press the number button 8, the backlight compensation is  
activated or deactivated. When it is activated, the “Backlight On” indicator is  
displayed. When it is deactivated, the “Backlight Off” indicator is displayed.  
Presetting the Angle and Zoom Settings  
Up to six settings for camera angle and zoom can be registered in the preset  
memory. Once you have stored the settings, you can easily recall them to move  
the camera.  
You can preset the settings in the monitor screen while in communication, and  
in the launcher menu while not in communication. You can also do so using  
the Camera menu.  
To preset the setting in the monitor screen while in communication  
1 Select the camera whose camera angle and zoom setting you want to  
preset.  
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander to open the Display  
Control menu, then select “Far” or “Near” under “Control”.  
96 Adjusting the Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Adjust the camera angle and zoom.  
Use the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle, and ZOOM button to  
adjust the zoom.  
3 Hold down one of the number buttons 1 to 6.  
The angle and zoom setting is stored in the selected number button, and the  
message “Registered to Preset number 1 (to 6).” appears.  
To preset the setting in the launcher menu while not in communication  
1 Adjust the camera angle and zoom in the launcher menu.  
Use the V, v, B or b button to select the screen and press the PUSH ENTER  
button, then press the V, v, B or b button to adjust the angle and the ZOOM  
buttons to adjust the zoom.  
2 Hold down one of the number buttons 1 to 6 or press the button and one  
of the 1 to 6 buttons.  
The angle and zoom setting is stored in the selected number button, and the  
message “Registered to Preset number 1 (to 6).” appears.  
To preset the setting using the Camera menu  
1 Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup  
menu, then press the V or v button to select  
(camera) icon.  
The Camera menu appears.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset  
Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
3 Select the preset number (1 to 6) with the V or v button, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
The color of the screen frame changes, then you can adjust the camera angle  
and zoom.  
Camera  
Preset Save  
Preset Load  
0
Adjustments  
1
2
3
4
5
6
4 While in communication, select the camera to be adjusted with the FAR/  
NEAR button on the Remote Commander.  
The FAR indicator is displayed on the monitor screen when the remote camera  
is selected.  
Adjusting the Camera 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Adjust the angle and zoom.  
Use the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle, and ZOOM button to  
adjust the zoom.  
6 Press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The setting is registered in the selected preset number.  
Recalling the Preset Angle and Zoom Setting  
You can move the camera to the preset position by recalling the preset camera  
angle and zoom with the monitor screen displayed while in communication.  
You can do the same with the launcher menu displayed while not in  
communication. Using the Camera menu also enables movement of the  
camera to the preset position.  
To recall the preset setting in the monitor screen while in communication  
1 Select the camera which you want to move to the preset position.  
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander to open the Display  
Control menu, then select “Far” or “Near” under “Control”.  
2 Press one of the number buttons 1 to 6 on the Remote Commander.  
The setting of the selected preset number is recalled, and the camera moves to  
the preset position. The message “Preset 1 (to 6) selected” appears.  
To recall the preset setting in the launcher menu while not in  
communication  
You can move the local camera to the preset position.  
1 Select the screen in the launcher menu, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
2 Press one of the number buttons 1 to 6 on the Remote Commander.  
The setting of the selected preset number is recalled, and the camera moves to  
the preset position. The message “Preset 1 (to 6) selected” appears.  
To recall the preset setting in the Camera menu  
1 Display the Camera menu.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset  
Load”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
98 Adjusting the Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Press the V or v button to select the preset number (1-6) you want to recall,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Camera  
Preset Save  
Preset Load  
0
Adjustments  
1
2
3
4
5
6
The setting of the preset number is recalled and the camera moves to the  
position of that setting.  
On backup  
The built-in lithium battery enables retention of the memories such as preset  
camera adjustments even if the Communication Terminal is turned off.  
Notes  
• The built-in lithium battery is kept charged as long as the system is operated. If the  
system is not used for a long time, the battery is gradually discharged. It will be  
completely discharged when you do not use the system for 12 weeks. To retain the  
system’s memory, recharge the battery.  
• To recharge the battery, connect the camera to the Communication Terminal and  
leave both units with the power on for about 48 hours.  
Adjusting the Camera 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound  
This section describes how to switch the picture displayed on the monitor  
screen, and how to switch the input picture and sound.  
Switching the Displayed Picture Between the Local and Remote  
Pictures  
1 Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.  
The Display Control menu appears.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Near” or  
“Far” under “Display”.  
Display Control  
Display  
Control  
Near  
Camera  
Far  
3 Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.  
Selecting the Input Picture  
1 Press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button on the Remote Commander.  
The Video Input Select menu appears.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the video  
input on the local site.  
Note  
While in communication you can switch the video input of the remote system by  
selecting “Far” in the Video Input Select menu.  
100 Selecting the Input Picture and Sound  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Video Input Select  
Local1  
Local2  
Main  
Split  
Off  
Far  
Main  
Main: Selects the video from the main camera.  
Sub camera: Selects the video from the secondary camera.  
IR1: Selects the video from the optional PCS-DS150/DS150P Document  
Stand.  
IR2: Selects the video from the optional PCS-DS150/DS150P Document  
Stand.  
AUX 1: Selects the video from the device connected to the MAIN (AUX IN)  
connector.  
AUX 2: Selects the video from the device connected to the SUB (AUX IN)  
connector.  
3 Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.  
To change the video input name displayed in the Video Input Select menu  
If you label “Main Camera”, “Sub Camera”, “IR1”, “IR2”, “AUX1”, or  
“AUX2” in Custom Input Label in the Video Setup menu, the specified name  
for each camera is displayed in the Video Input Select menu in step 2 above.  
For example, you can label as such: Main, Document, Camera2, None.  
For details on “Custom Input Label”, see “Video Setup Menu” on page 52.  
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching the Picture Displayed on the TV Monitor  
Each press of the DISPLAY button on the Remote Commander switches the  
picture displayed on the monitor screen as follows:  
Picture shot by the remote  
camera 1  
DISPLAY button  
Remote camera 2  
(Only during dual video  
reception)  
Still image transmitted or  
received  
RGB picture  
Picture on a whiteboard  
Notes  
• A still image is displayed only when it has been transmitted or received.  
from a computer via the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box connected to the  
• A picture on a whiteboard is displayed only when notes written on a whiteboard are  
transmitted or received.  
For details, see “Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for  
a Conference” on page 146 and “Videoconference Using a Whiteboard page  
153.  
102 Selecting the Input Picture and Sound  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switching the Sound to Be Sent to the Remote Party  
You can switch the sound sent to the remote party between the sound from the  
microphone and that from the connected equipment. Use “Input Select” in the  
Audio Setup menu.  
For details on the “Input Select” setting, see page 50.  
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring the Local Picture as a  
Window Picture – PinP Feature  
You can display the picture shot by the local camera on your monitor screen  
as a window picture (Picture-in-Picture). This function enables you to check  
how your own party is monitored on the remote site.  
To display the window picture  
Press the PinP button on the Remote Commander.  
The local picture is displayed as a window picture.  
Local picture  
Remote picture  
To change the location of the window picture  
Each press of the PinP button changes the location of the window as follows:  
The window picture  
Monitor screen  
disappears.  
Notes  
• The window picture is displayed in the same location as it was last located. The  
window picture does not appear if it was not previously displayed.  
• The window picture is not available while not in communication with a remote party.  
To display the remote picture as a window picture  
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander to open the Display  
Control menu and select “Near” under “Display” when the local picture is  
displayed as a window picture. The remote picture is displayed as a window  
picture with the local picture as the main picture.  
104 Monitoring the Local Picture as a Window Picture – PinP Feature  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Conducting a Videoconference Using  
the Dual Video Function  
The dual video function allows the simultaneous sending and receiving of two  
images using two cameras.  
System Configuration Using 2 Cameras and 3 Monitors  
This section describes how to configure a system using 2 cameras and 3 monitors.  
Notes  
• Be sure to turn off all the equipment before making any connections.  
• Do not connect/disconnect the camera cable with the power on. Doing so may damage  
the Camera Unit or Communication Terminal.  
Conducting a Videoconference Using the Dual Video Function 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
.
First camera  
First monitor  
Second camera  
PCSA-CG70/  
CG70P Camera  
Unit (supplied)  
Camera cable (supplied)  
Camera cable  
(supplied)  
to SUB CAMERA  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
to MAIN CAMERA  
Communication Terminal  
to DSB  
to VIDEO OUT  
MONITOR 2  
toRGB  
OUT  
PCSA-DSB1S  
Data Solution Box  
(not supplied)  
Additional monitor B  
(projector, etc.)  
Additional monitor A  
(projector, etc.)  
Signal cable  
(not supplied)  
Additional monitor C  
(projector, etc.)  
Signal cable  
(not supplied)  
to S-video input  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
• When you want to conduct a videoconference using the dual video function, the  
H.239 setting of the Communication Setup menu of both local and remote terminals  
must be “On”.  
• Up to four monitors can be connected to the system. However, only three monitors,  
including the first monitor, can be used at one time.  
For details, see “Using Multiple Monitors” on page 122. The dual video  
function can only be used in a two-point videoconference.  
106 Conducting a Videoconference Using the Dual Video Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Activating the Dual Video Function  
You can either activate the dual video function at when starting a  
videoconference or during a videoconference.  
Note  
If you transfer to a multipoint videoconference while the dual video function  
is in use, it automatically stops.  
If you send images through the PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box while the  
dual video function is in use, it stops until the image transfer is complete, and  
then resumes.  
To activate dual video when starting a videoconference  
Set “Dual Video” in the Video Setup menu to “On”. (See page 52.)  
Sending and receiving of dual video begins automatically when a  
videoconference is started.  
To activate dual video during a videoconference  
While the videoconference is in progress, press the PUSH ENTER button on  
the Remote Commander to display the communication submenu, and then set  
“Dual Video” to “On”.  
Note  
If the dual video function cannot be used, “Dual Video” does not appear on the  
communication submenu.  
To change the monitor display  
To switch the display of the first monitor, press the FAR/NEAR button on the  
Remote Commander. To change the display on another monitor, press the  
DISPLAY button on the Remote Commander. Each time you press the  
DISPLAY button, the display changes.  
For details, see “Using Multiple Monitors” on page 122.  
Conducting a Videoconference Using the Dual Video Function 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4:  
Videoconference  
With Optional  
Equipment  
This chapter describes the various videoconferences using the optional  
equipment in addition to the components contained in the PCS-G70/G70P  
Video Communication System.  
To conduct a data conference using the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution  
Box, see chapter 5.  
To conduct a multipoint conference, see chapter 8.  
Using Still Images Stored on a “Memory  
Stick” for a Videoconference  
You can display the still images stored in the optional “Memory Stick” or  
transmit them to a remote party.  
Displaying a Still Image Stored on a “Memory Stick”  
1 Insert the “Memory Stick” containing the still images into the Memory  
Stick slot on the Communication Terminal.  
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the direction of the arrow with the mark facing  
upward.  
108 Using Still Images Stored on a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 Open the Memory Stick menu.  
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,  
and select  
(Memory Stick) icon with the V or v button.  
Memory Stick  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
Save  
Memory Stick Format  
JPEG  
JPEG  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the still  
image you want to display, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The submenu appears.  
Memory Stick  
JPEG  
Send  
Load  
Delete  
Slide Show  
Save  
Cancel  
Memory Stick Format  
4 Use the V or v button to select “Load”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
The menu disappears and the selected still image is displayed on the monitor  
screen.  
To clear the still image from the monitor screen  
While the still image is displayed, press the PUSH ENTER button on the  
Remote Commander. The Memory Stick menu is restored.  
Viewing a slide show  
You can view still images stored on a “Memory Stick” slide by slide. (Slide  
Show)  
1 Insert the “Memory Stick” into the Memory Stick slot, and display the  
Memory Stick menu.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a still  
image from which you want to start a slide show, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
Using Still Images Stored on a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The submenu appears.  
Memory Stick  
JPEG  
Send  
Load  
Delete  
Slide Show  
Cancel  
Save  
Memory Stick Format  
3 Use the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Slide Show”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The slide show starts. During communication with a remote party, the still  
images are transmitted to the remote party.  
The  
indicator is displayed on the monitor screen during the slide show.  
4 Press the b button on the Remote Commander to advance a slide. Pressing  
the B button goes back to the previous slide.  
To select another still image during the slide show  
Pressing the PUSH ENTER button during the slide show opens the submenu.  
2/4  
Stop  
Press the B or b button to select the desired still image, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button. The selected image is displayed in full screen. During  
communication it will be transmitted to the remote party.  
To stop the slide show  
While the submenu is open, select “Stop” with the v button and press the  
PUSH ENTER button.  
While the submenu is not open, press the RETURN button on the Remote  
Commander. The Memory Stick menu is restored.  
110 Using Still Images Stored on a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To delete a still image  
Display the Memory Stick menu, select the still image you want to delete, and  
press the PUSH ENTER button. Select “Delete” from the displayed submenu  
with the V or v button, then press the PUSH ENTER button. The selected still  
image is deleted from the “Memory Stick”.  
To remove the “Memory Stick”  
Push the “Memory Stick” and release your finger. The “Memory Stick” will  
come out a little, and you can then remove it.  
Sending a Still Image Stored on a “Memory Stick”  
While in communication, you can send still images stored on a “Memory  
Stick” to the remote party.  
1 Insert a “Memory Stick” into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication  
Terminal, and display the Memory Stick menu.  
For how to insert a “Memory Stick” and how to display the Memory Stick  
menu, see “Displaying a Still Image Stored on a “Memory Stick”” on page  
108.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the still  
image you want to send, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The submenu appears.  
Memory Stick  
JPEG  
Send  
Load  
Delete  
Slide Show  
Save  
Cancel  
Memory Stick Format  
3 Use the V or v button to select “Send”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
The selected still image is displayed, and is sent to the remote party. The  
message “The still image has been sent.” appears on the monitor screen.  
If you select “Slide Show” from the submenu and press the PUSH ENTER  
button, a slide show starts from the selected still image, and it will be sent to  
the remote party.  
For details on a slide show, see page 109.  
Using Still Images Stored on a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Formatting a “Memory Stick”  
Notes  
• “Memory Sticks” formatted on a computer are not guaranteed to work with  
this system. Always use “Memory Sticks” formatted with the system.  
• Formatting a “Memory Stick” deletes all images, addresses and other data  
saved on the “Memory Stick”.  
To format a “Memory Stick”  
Select “Memory Stick Format” in the Memory Stick menu, and the “Format a  
Memory Stick?” message appears. Select “OK” to format the “Memory Stick”.  
When an unformatted “Memory Stick” is inserted  
The “Format a Memory Stick?” message appears. Select “OK” to format the  
“Memory Stick”. Select “Cancel” to cancel the formatting operation.  
112 Using Still Images Stored on a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images  
You can send motion pictures shot by the Camera or those output from the  
connected external equipment as still images.  
you send them as still images. The images become clearer than motion pictures  
and the texts are easy to read. When using the “Split” feature of the dual video  
function, you can only send still images from the main monitor.  
For details, see “Conducting a Videoconference Using the Dual Video  
Function” on page 105.  
Sending Still Images Using the Still Image Menu  
While in communication with the remote party, you can send motion pictures  
shot by the local camera as still images. You can send one still image or still  
images continuously.  
1 Open the Still Image menu.  
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,  
and select the  
(still image) icon with the V or v button.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Send”  
or “Continuous Send”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Still Image  
Send  
Continuous Send  
Stop  
Save  
Send Object  
3 Adjust the camera angle and zoom and press the PUSH ENTER button, if  
necessary.  
For details on the adjustments of the camera angle and zoom, see  
“Adjusting the Camera Angle and Zoom” on page 93.  
The motion picture displayed on the local monitor screen freezes, and a still  
picture will be sent to the remote party. If you select “Send”, a still image is  
sent. When transmission is finished, the message “The still image has been  
sent.” appears.  
When “Continuous Send” is selected, still images are sent continuously. The  
sending interval depends on the transmission rate and the image type.  
Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To stop “Continuous Send”  
Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander. Select “Stop”  
from the displayed submenu with the V or v button, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
To cancel still image display  
Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the  
submenu. Select “Clear” with the V or v button, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
Sending a Still Image Using the Communication Submenu  
You can easily send only one image displayed on the monitor screen as a still  
image during communication.  
1 Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander during  
communication.  
The Communication submenu appears.  
Phone Book  
Dual Video  
Presentation  
Whiteboard  
Send  
Save  
Reject Answer  
Icon display  
End  
2 Press the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Send”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The motion picture displayed on the local monitor screen freezes, and a still  
picture is sent to the remote party. When transmission is finished, the message  
“The still image has been sent.” appears.  
To cancel still image display  
Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the  
communication submenu. Select “Clear” with the V or v button, then press the  
PUSH ENTER button. When a still image is displayed on the monitor screen,  
the “Send” indication changes to “Clear”.  
To hide the communication submenu  
Select “End” from the menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
When you are receiving a still image  
You cannot send a still image to the remote party. Select “Clear”, then send the  
still image.  
114 Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Motion Pictures Output from a Document Stand as Still  
Images  
During communication motion pictures output from the optional PCS-DS150/  
DS150P Document Stand connected to the Communication Terminal can be  
frozen, and you can send a still image to the remote party.  
PCS-DS150/DS150P  
Document Stand (not  
supplied)  
To send a still image  
1 Shoot the image you want to send with the Document Stand.  
For details how to operate the Document Stand, refer to the Operating  
Instructions supplied with the Document Stand.  
2 Open the Still Image menu.  
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,  
then select the  
(still image) icon with the V or v button.  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Send  
Object”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The picture shot by the Document Stand is displayed on the monitor screen and  
is sent to the remote party as a still image.  
Still Image  
Send  
Continuous Send  
Stop  
Save  
Send Object  
Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Motion Pictures Input from an External Camera or Other  
Equipment as Still Images  
During communication a motion picture output from an external camera or  
VCR connected to the Communication Terminal can be frozen, and then sent  
to the remote party.  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
EVI-D100 camera (not supplied)  
or BRC-300 camera (not supplied)  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BAT
10B
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
2
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
I
AUX  
MONITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
to MAIN  
AUX IN  
VISCA cable (not supplied)  
to video  
output  
Video cable (not supplied)  
Video converter  
cable (supplied)  
VCR, etc.  
to S-video  
output  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
To send a still image  
1 Open the Still Image menu.  
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,  
then select the (still image) icon with the V or v button.  
2 Display the picture you want to send on the monitor screen.  
Press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button on the Remote Commander to  
display the Video Input Select menu, then select “AUX1” under “Near”, and  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Notes  
• Still images can only be sent from the device connected to the MAIN AUX IN  
connector.  
• Selecting “IR1” or “IR2” allows you to display images input from the optional  
PCS-DS150/DS150P Document Stand on the monitor.  
• If you label “Main Camera”, “Sub Camera”, “IR1”, “IR2”, “AUX1”, or “AUX2”  
in Custom Input Label in the Video Setup menu, the specified name for each  
camera is displayed in the Video Input Select menu.  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Send”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The motion picture on the monitor screen freezes, and a still picture is sent to  
the remote party. The still picture remains even after sending.  
To cancel the still image display on the answering site  
Select “Clear”, or switch the input picture.  
116 Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Receiving Still Images from a Remote  
Party  
During communication, you can receive still images taken by the remote  
camera if the “Far End Camera Control” on page 3 of the Communication  
Setup menu.  
1 Open the Still Image menu.  
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,  
then select the  
(still image) icon with the V or v button.  
2 Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.  
The picture shot by the remote camera and the FAR indicator appear on the  
monitor screen in the Still Image menu window. “Send” in the menu turns to  
“Receive”.  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select  
“Receive”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Still Image  
Send  
Continuous Send  
Stop  
Save  
Send Object  
The remote picture displayed on the monitor screen is received as a still image.  
To cancel still image display  
Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the  
submenu. Select “Clear” with the V or v button, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
Receiving Still Images from a Remote Party 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving Still Images to a “Memory Stick”  
You can save the picture shot by the local camera or input picture from the  
connected equipment or the remote picture during conference on a “Memory  
Stick”.  
Saving Still Images Using the Still Image Menu  
1 Open the Communication Terminal front panel, and then insert the  
“Memory Stick” used to save images into the Memory Stick slot.  
2 Open the Still Image menu.  
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,  
then select the  
(still image) icon with the V or v button.  
3 Display the picture you want to save on the monitor screen.  
To switch the input on the local site, press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button  
on the Remote Commander to display the Video Input Select menu, select the  
desired picture, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
To save the remote picture, switch to the picture on the remote site with the  
FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander, and select the desired picture.  
4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Still Image  
Send  
Continuous Send  
Stop  
Save  
Send Object  
The picture displayed on the monitor screen will be saved as a still image to the  
“Memory Stick”.  
Notes  
• Do not remove the “Memory Stick” until the data is completely loaded. If you do, the  
“Memory Stick” may be damaged or the Communication Terminal may cause a  
malfunction.  
• A still image file is saved as a new file. It will not be overwritten.  
118 Saving Still Images to a “Memory Stick”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
When the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
“LOCK” when you selected “Save” in step 4  
The message “Memory Stick write-protected” appears and you cannot save the  
still image file.  
When the memory of the “Memory Stick” is full  
The message “Memory full.” appears and you cannot save the still image file.  
Image format that can be stored on a “Memory Stick”  
File name  
The image file is saved as “DSCXXXXX.jpg”.  
Compression format  
The Communication Terminal compresses and records the recorded image  
data in the JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) format. The file  
extension is “.jpg”.  
Note  
The Communication Terminal is not compatible with progressive JPEG  
format data.  
Saving Still Images Using the Memory Stick Menu  
You can save still pictures using the “Memory Stick” “Save” thumbnail  
displayed on the Memory Stick menu.  
1 Insert the “Memory Stick” to which you are saving the images into the  
Memory Stick slot.  
2 Display the picture you want to save.  
To switch the input on the local site, press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button  
on the Remote Commander to display the Video Input Select menu, select the  
desired picture, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
To save the remote picture, switch to the picture on the remote site with the  
FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander, and select the desired picture.  
3 Open the Memory Stick menu.  
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,  
then select the  
(“Memory Stick”) icon with the V or v button.  
Saving Still Images to a “Memory Stick” 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the Save  
button, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Memory Stick  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
JPEG  
Save  
Memory Stick Format  
The selected picture is saved to the “Memory Stick” and a thumbnail is  
created.  
Saving Still Images Using the Communication Submenu  
You can promptly save the picture displayed on the monitor screen during  
communication to the “Memory Stick” as a still image.  
1 During communication with the remote party press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
The communication submenu appears.  
Phone Book  
Dual Video  
Presentation  
Whiteboard  
Send  
Save  
Reject Answer  
Icon display  
End  
2 Press the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The displayed picture is frozen and saved to the “Memory Stick” as a still  
image.  
After saving, the message “Still image saved to Memory Stick.” appears.  
To hide the communication submenu  
Select “End” in the menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
120 Saving Still Images to a “Memory Stick”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using a Convenient Menu Available  
during Communication — The  
Communication Submenu  
During communication with a remote party, pressing the PUSH ENTER  
button on the Remote Commander opens the communication submenu.  
The communication submenu allows you to perform operations often used  
during communication only by selecting the item in the menu.  
Communication submenu  
Phone Book  
Dual Video  
Presentation  
Whiteboard  
Send  
Save  
Reject Answer  
Icon display  
End  
Selecting each item with the V or v button and pressing the PUSH ENTER  
button enables the following operations:  
Dual Video: Starts dual video. Only appears during a two-way  
videoconference.  
Presentation: Sends the RGB picture input from the optional PCSA-DSB1S  
Data Solution Box to a remote party. After it does, the item changes to  
“Presentation  
”. Selecting “Presentation  
” ends the transmission of  
the RGB picture. Only appears when the Data Solution Box is connected  
to the Communication Terminal.  
Whiteboard: Sends notes written on a whiteboard with the mimio Xi attached.  
After it does, the item changes to “Whiteboard  
”. Selecting  
“Whiteboard ” ends the transmission of notes on the whiteboard. Only  
appears when the whiteboard with the installed mimio Xi is connected.  
Reject Answer: Rejects incoming calls from other terminals during a  
multipoint videoconference.  
Icon Display: Displays the on-screen indicators if they are not shown. While  
the indicators are displayed, the item changes to “Indicator  
“Indicator ” hides the indicators.  
Phone Book: Shows the Phone Book menu.  
”. Selecting  
Send: Sends the picture displayed on the monitor as a still image to a remote  
party. After it does, the item changes to “Clear”. Selecting “Clear” restores  
the motion picture from the camera.  
Save: Saves the picture displayed on the monitor to a “Memory Stick” as a still  
image.  
End: Clears the communication submenu.  
Using a Convenient Menu Available during Communication — The Communication 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Submenu  
   
Using Multiple Monitors  
By connecting several monitors to the system, you can display different  
material, such as video or still images, on different monitors.  
Using Two Monitors–Dual Monitor Setup  
By connecting two monitors, you can use one as a video-only display.  
To connect a second monitor  
To connect a second monitor, simply connect it to the VIDEO OUT  
MONITOR 2 or RGB OUT connector of the Communication Terminal, or the  
RGB OUT connector of the Data Solution Box.  
If your second monitor is a Sony monitor, connect the supplied IR repeater  
immediately under the monitor's remote sensor, and connect the other end of  
the IR repeater cable to the IR OUT 2 connector of the Communication  
Terminal.  
Additional monitor A  
(projector, etc.)  
First monitor  
S-video cable (supplied)  
to S-video input  
to audio input  
Audiocable  
(supplied)  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution  
Box (not supplied)  
IR repeater  
(supplied)  
to  
AUDIO  
OUT  
to VIDEO  
OUT  
MONITOR 1  
to IR out 1  
to DSB  
to IR out 2  
to RGB OUT  
to VIDEO  
OUT  
Additional monitor B  
(projector, etc.)  
MONITOR 2  
Signal cable  
(not supplied)  
Additional monitor C  
to S-video input  
S-video cable  
(not supplied)  
IR repeater (supplied)  
under the remote sensor  
122 Using Multiple Monitors  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To change the settings  
Set “Monitors” in “Monitor Out” of the Video Setup menu to “2”. Next, select  
in “Monitor Out” of the Video Setup menu to “SUB”. Once the settings are  
changed, the first monitor displays video, while the second displays still  
images.  
For details, see “To change the images displayed in a dual monitor setup” on  
page 124.  
To view the picture as a window picture  
When you press the PinP button of the Remote Commander during  
communication, the picture appears as a smaller window picture over the  
display of the first monitor.  
Note  
You cannot perform this operation on the second monitor.  
Using Multiple Monitors 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change the images displayed in a dual monitor setup  
You can display the following on the monitors during communication in a dual  
monitor setup.  
Second monitor  
Remote  
camera 1  
First monitor  
Local party  
DISPLAY button  
Remote  
camera 2  
Remote party  
(Only during  
dual video  
reception)  
FAR/NEAR  
button  
Remote party  
Still image  
Local party  
RGB image  
Picture on a  
whiteboard  
First monitor  
You can display either local or remote camera video.  
When alternating between local and remote video, press the FAR/NEAR  
button of the Remote Commander, and then make the appropriate selection on  
the display control menu that appears.  
Second monitor  
You can display local camera video, received or transmitted still images, RGB  
images transmitted through the Data Solution Box PCSA-DSB1S, or  
whiteboard images.  
124 Using Multiple Monitors  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Each time that you press the DISPLAY button of the Remote Commander, the  
display changes.  
Note  
If there is no RGB or still image feed, it is not possible to alternate the display as  
outlined above.  
Using Multiple Monitors 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Three Monitors–Triple Monitor Setup  
By connecting three monitors, you can use two as video-only displays.  
To connect a third monitor  
To connect a second and a third monitor, simply connect them to the VIDEO  
OUT MONITOR 2 or RGB OUT connector of the Communication Terminal,  
or the RGB OUT connector of the Data Solution Box.  
Additional monitor A  
(projector, etc.)  
First monitor  
S-video cable (supplied)  
to S-video input  
to audio input  
Audiocable  
(supplied)  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution  
Box (not supplied)  
IR repeater  
(supplied)  
to  
AUDIO  
OUT  
to VIDEO  
OUT  
MONITOR 1  
to IR out 1  
to DSB  
to IR out 2  
to RGB OUT  
to VIDEO  
OUT  
Additional monitor B  
(projector, etc.)  
MONITOR 2  
Signal cable  
(not supplied)  
Additional monitor C  
to S-video input  
S-video cable  
(not supplied)  
IR repeater (supplied)  
under the remote sensor  
126 Using Multiple Monitors  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To change the settings  
Set “Monitors” in “Monitor Out” of the Video Setup menu to “3”. Next, you  
“Monitor” in “Monitor Out” of the Video Setup menu to “SUB”. Once the  
settings are changed, the first monitor displays video, while the second and  
third display video or still images.  
For details, see “To change the images displayed in a triple monitor setup” on  
this page.  
To view the picture as a window picture  
When you press the PinP button of the Remote Commander during  
communication, the picture appears as a smaller window picture over the  
display of the first monitor.  
Note  
You cannot perform this operation on the second and third monitors.  
To change the images displayed in a triple monitor setup  
You can display the following on the monitors during communication in a  
triple monitor setup.  
Second monitor  
Third monitor  
First monitor  
Local  
Local  
Local  
picture  
picture  
picture  
Remote  
camera 1  
Still  
image  
RGB  
picture  
FAR/NEAR  
button  
Remote  
camera 1  
Remote  
Local  
picture  
camera 2  
(Only during  
dual video  
reception)  
Picture  
on  
whiteboard  
In this setup, each time that you press the DISPLAY button on the Remote  
Commander, the entire display structure changes in sequence.  
First monitor  
You can display remote camera video.  
Second monitor  
You can display local camera video, received or transmitted still images, or  
remote camera video.  
Each time that you press the DISPLAY button of the Remote Commander, the  
display changes.  
Using Multiple Monitors 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Third monitor  
You can display local camera video, RGB images transmitted through the Data  
Solution Box PCSA-DSB1S, or whiteboard images.  
Note  
If there is no RGB or still image feed, it is not possible to alternate the display as  
outlined above.  
128 Using Multiple Monitors  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Multiple Microphones  
You can connect several optional PCS-A1 or PCS-A300 microphones to the  
system, allowing more people to participate in the conference.  
To connect the optional microphones  
Connect the optional microphones to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 connectors on the  
Communication Terminal. Power is supplied to the microphones from the  
terminal.  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
IE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
IR OUT  
EC-MIC  
RGB OU
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
AUX  
OR  
VIDEO T  
to MIC 2  
to MIC 1  
PCS-A1 (not supplied) or PCS-A300 microphone  
To use the connected microphone  
Set “Mic Select” to “MIC” on page 1 of the Audio Setup menu.  
(See page 50.)  
Notes on installation of the microphones  
• Install microphone about 50 cm away from the participants.  
• Install the speakers behind the microphones.  
• Place the microphone in a quiet, echo-free location.  
• Install microphones away from equipment that may cause noise.  
• Avoid covering a microphone with paper, etc., or moving it. If you do either,  
extreme noise and echo may be heard temporarily by the remote party. In this  
case, wait until the echo disappears.  
Using Multiple Microphones 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Microphone layout examples  
PCS-A300 microphones  
PCS-A300  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
PCS-A1 microphones  
PCS-A1  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
130 Using Multiple Microphones  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Communication Transducer  
(CTE)  
The CTE Communication Transducer is an integrated system equipped with  
uni-directional microphones and omni-directional acoustic speaker. The unit is  
enabled to pick up clear voice with minimum background noise from all  
directions and to emit clear sound equally in all directions.  
To connect the CTE-600 Communication Transducer  
CTE-600  
to an input/output  
connector  
Interface box  
(supplied with the CTE-600)  
Cable  
(supplied  
with the  
CTE-600)  
to DC 6V  
to an input/output  
connector  
to LINE  
OUT  
to LINE  
IN  
AC adaptor (supplied  
with the CTE-600)  
Cable (not supplied)  
to a wall  
outlet  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
IR OUT  
BOARD  
C-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
to AUDIO  
IN  
1
2
CTRL-S  
2
ISDN UNIT  
Cable (not supplied)  
AUX  
MONITOR  
VOUT  
to AUDIO OUT  
To use the Communication Transducer (CTE)  
• Set “CTE” on page 1 of the Audio Setup menu to “LINE”. (page 50)  
• Set the SYSTEM SELECT switch at the bottom of the Communication  
Transducer to “PCS”.  
For detailed information on the Communication Transducer, refer to the  
Operating Instructions that come with the Communication Transducer.  
Using the Communication Transducer (CTE) 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CTE layout example  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
CTE-600  
132 Using the Communication Transducer (CTE)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Audio During a Conference  
You can record the voices of the participants on both the remote and local sites  
during a conference if you connect a cassette recorder to the AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED) jack on the Communication Terminal.  
This is convenient for taking minutes of the conference.  
To connect a cassette recorder  
Cassette recorder, etc.  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
MONITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
to AUDIO OUT (MIXED)  
to audio  
input  
Audio cable (not supplied)  
When recording with a cassette recorder  
When a cassette recorder is connected to both the AUDIO IN and AUDIO  
OUT (MIXED) jacks, set “Recording Mute” to “On” on page 1 of the Audio  
Setup menu to prevent from reflecting echo on a remote party. (See page 50.)  
Recording Audio During a Conference 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Audio/Video from the External  
Equipment to a Remote Party  
The Communication Terminal allows you to send the picture and sound output  
from the connected equipment such as a VCR to the remote party.  
To connect the video equipment for input  
The Communication Terminal is equipped with two video inputs.  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
VCR, etc.  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BAX/  
10-
DC 19.5V  
1
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
AUX  
MONIT
VIDEO OU
to  
to  
MAIN  
AUX  
IN  
SUB  
AUX  
IN  
to AUDIO IN  
to video  
output  
to audio  
output  
Audio cable (not supplied)  
Video cable (not supplied)  
Video  
conversion cable  
(supplied)  
VCR, etc.  
to S-video  
output  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
Note  
Be sure to connect the audio cable to either of two VCRs.  
To input audio/video from external equipment  
To input video  
Open the Video Input Select menu by pressing the VIDEO INPUT SELECT  
button on the Remote Commander, then select the desired video input from the  
“Near” text box in the menu.  
To input the video from the equipment connected to the MAIN AUX IN or  
SUB AUX IN jack, choose “AUX 1” or “AUX 2”, respectively.  
134 Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To input audio  
Set “Input Select” to “AUX” or “MIC + AUX” on page 1 of the Audio Setup  
menu. (See page 50.)  
When set to “AUX”, the sound from the external equipment is input and the  
sound from a microphone is deactivated. When set to “MIC + AUX”, both  
sounds are input.  
Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conducting a Conference Without the  
Picture – Voice Meeting  
Using the PCS-G70/G70P Video Communication System, you can conduct a  
voice only conference via a normal phone without connecting the  
videoconferencing system. (Voice Meeting)  
Basic connection procedures are the same as those for videoconferencing.  
Conducting a voice meeting with a remote party not registered in the phone  
book  
Set “Line I/F” to “ISDN(Telephone)” on page 1 of the Dial Setup menu.  
During the Voice Meeting, the “Voice Only” indicator is displayed.  
For “Line I/F” setting, see “To call a remote party not registered in the Phone  
Book” on page 79.  
To register a remote party for a Voice Meeting  
Set “Line I/F” to “ISDN(Telephone)” in the List Edit menu displayed from the  
Phone Book menu.  
For registration, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” on page 68.  
To set the audio compression format  
Select the audio compression format by setting “Telephone Mode” on page 1  
of the Dial Setup menu.  
When you initiate the voice meeting, set “Telephone Mode” to “Auto”. When  
set to “Auto”, the G.711 µ-law format is automatically selected.  
You need not set the audio compression format when receiving a call from the  
remote party.  
For the “Telephone Mode” setting, see page 44.  
136 Conducting a Conference Without the Picture – Voice Meeting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling the Remote System With  
the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission  
The Video Communication System enables you to control the remote system  
connected by transmitting the tone signal (DTMF: Dual Tone Multi  
Frequency) assigned to the numbers for dialing (0-9,  
,
).  
1 Press the button on the Remote Commander during communication.  
The DTMF menu appears on the monitor screen.  
2 Press one of the number buttons (0-9,  
,
) on the Remote Commander  
corresponding to the tone signal you want to transmit to the remote party.  
The tone signal will be transmitted when the button is pressed.  
3 To stop transmitting the tone signal, press the PUSH ENTER button on the  
Remote Commander.  
The DTMF menu disappears.  
Controlling the Remote System With the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Conducting a Data Conference Using  
NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference  
Connecting the Communication Terminal to the computer with NetMeeting*  
installed enables conduct of a data conference in compliance with the T.120  
standard of the ITU-T Recommendation via the PCS-G70/G70P Video  
Communication System only when it is connected over ISDN.  
* NetMeeting is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
Notes  
• When the Communication Terminal is used for a multipoint videoconference, the  
T.120 data conference is not available.  
• When the PCS-G70/G70P Video Communication System is connected with a  
videoconferencing system at the remote party via LAN, conduct the T.120 data  
conference using a computer instead of the PCS-PG70/PG70P.  
To connect a computer  
To connect a computer to the connector on the Communication  
Terminal  
Use a commercially available UTP cross cable (category 5) to connect the  
LAN connector on the computer with the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector  
on the Communication Terminal.  
PCSA-B768S  
ISDN Unit  
to 100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
to 100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
UTP cross cable  
(not supplied)  
UTP cross cable  
(not supplied)  
to LAN  
connector  
to LAN  
connector  
Computer  
Computer  
138 Conducting a Data Conference Using NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To connect to a computer via a hub  
Connect the Communication Terminal to a computer using the UTP straight  
cable.  
Computer  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
Hub  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
AUX  
MONITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
to 100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
to LAN connector  
UTP straight cable (not supplied)  
To configure the Communication Terminal  
Open the “Device Setup” on page 1 of the General Setup menu, and then enter  
the IP address of the computer where the NetMeeting application is installed  
in the “T.120 PC Address” text box. (See page 54.)  
Set “T.120 Data” to “On” on page 3 of the Communication Setup menu. (See  
page 48.)  
Note  
We recommend that you set “Audio Mode” to “G.728” on page 3 of the Communication  
Setup menu.  
To connect to a remote party using NetMeeting  
Before connecting, install the NetMeeting application in your computer.  
1 Double-click the NetMeeting icon, or click “NetMeeting” from the Start  
menu on the computer’s window.  
NetMeeting starts.  
2 Set the Communication Terminal to communication mode.  
Check that the “T.120” indicator is displayed on the monitor screen.  
3 Click “Calling” in the NetMeeting window on the computer of either a  
local or remote party.  
4 Enter the IP address set for the Communication Terminal in the “Address”  
text box of the “Call to” dialog box.  
Conducting a Data Conference Using NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Click “Call”.  
After a while the connection is completed.  
For details on how to operate, refer to the Help menu of the NetMeeting  
application.  
About the transmission rate  
The Communication Terminal supports the following transmission rates:  
MLP: 6.4 Kbps, 24 Kbps, 32 Kbps  
HMLP: 62.4 Kbps, 64 Kbps, 128 Kbps.  
140 Conducting a Data Conference Using NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing the Communication  
Terminal  
The following controls are available to access the Communication Terminal.  
For details on each control, consult your Sony dealer.  
Accessing the IP address of the Communication Terminal from a Web browser  
allows you to control or set up the terminal.  
For details on the password to access or Web monitoring feature, see  
“Administrator Setup Menu” on page 56.  
Using Telnet  
Accessing the IP address of the Communication Terminal from Telnet allows  
you to control or set up the terminal.  
For details on the password to access or Web monitoring feature, see  
“Administrator Setup Menu” on page 56.  
Accessing the Communication Terminal 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Data  
Conference  
This chapter shows you how to use the data from a computer, etc. connected  
to the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box for a conference.  
The optional PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box is equipped with various input/  
output connectors. For example, connecting the RGB output on a computer  
enables you to transmit the pictures or text data displayed on the computer to  
a remote party. When you connect a projector, you can display a high-  
resolution image from a computer on the projector at a high transmission rate.  
The PCSA-DSB1S is also equipped with connectors for connecting active  
speakers and microphones. The PCSA-DSB1S is connected with the  
Communication Terminal using the interface cable for exclusive use.  
The party who receives the data, even if the party has no Data Solution Box or  
uses another videoconferencing system such as PCS-11/11P and PCS-1600,  
can view the computer images sent from the other party. However, the quality  
Solution Box is used by the party who receives the data, a larger number of  
frames per second is obtained than the system without the Data Solution Box.  
It allows you to obtain a high-resolution motion picture from a computer.  
For details on picture quality depending on the system components, see  
“Picture quality of the data solution box” on page 148.  
For details on RGB signal specifications, see “Acceptable RGB Input/Output  
Signals” on page 215.  
Restrictions on the IP address of the system when using the Data  
Solution Box  
The IP address available for the PCS-G70/G70P Video Communication  
System is restricted when you use the Data Solution Box. Moreover, a network  
for communication between the Data Solution Box and the Communication  
Terminal should be set up to be a separate segment.  
As a result, unusable IP address is the value obtained from the AND operation  
with the address of the Data Solution Box for communication and the network  
mask.  
(Unusable IP address for the PCS-PG70/PG70P) = (IP address of the  
PCSA-DSB1S) & (Network mask)  
The IP address of the PCSA-DSB1S is fixed at “192.254.1.2”. If the Network  
mask is assumed to be “255.255.0.0”, an unusable IP address is as follows:  
192.254.m.n (0  
m
255, 0  
n
255)  
Note on the camera picture when using the Data Solution Box  
When transmitting a signal via the Data Solution Box, the camera picture  
quality will be lower owing to the decreased number of frames.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connection Example Using the Data  
Solution Box  
Notes  
• Be sure not to turn on the power of each unit until all the connections are completed.  
• Do not connect/disconnect the camera cable or the interface cable with the power on.  
Doing so may damage the Camera Unit, Communication Terminal or Data Solution  
Box.  
• Used with the Data Solution Box for the first time, the Communication Terminal may  
automatically upgrade the software of the Data Solution Box. While the upgrading  
message is displayed on the monitor screen, be sure not to turn off the Communication  
Terminal. Doing so may cause malfunction of the system.  
PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera  
Unit  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
Communication Terminal  
Interface cable (supplied with  
the PCSA-DSB1S)  
to DSB  
to TERMINAL  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box  
Rear  
Front  
LINE OUT  
OUT  
AUX  
IN  
MIC  
1
MIC  
2
MIC  
3
MIC  
4
MIC  
5
TO PROSOR  
RGB OUT  
to RGB OUT  
to RGB  
IN B  
to RGB IN A  
to LINE  
OUT  
to MIC 1  
– MIC 5  
D-sub 15-pin  
cable  
(not supplied)  
D-sub 15-pin  
cable (not  
supplied)  
D-sub 15-  
pin cable  
(not  
supplied)  
Computer  
PCS-A1 (not supplied) or  
PCS-A300 microphone (not  
supplied)  
Projector, etc.  
Active speakers  
Computer  
Connection Example Using the Data Solution Box 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notes on the connection example  
• Power to the Data Solution Box is supplied from the PCS-PG70/PCS-PG70P  
Communication Terminal with a connection described above.  
• Connect a projector, etc. to the RGB OUT connector on the Data Solution  
Box.  
This connection enables you:  
– To display the computer picture on the local site while transmitting it to the  
remote site.  
– To display the received computer picture with optimum picture quality.  
The received computer picture can also be output from the VIDEO OUT or  
RGB OUT connector on the PCS-PG70/PCS-PG70P Communication  
Terminal, but the computer picture while transmitting cannot be output from  
these connectors.  
Notes on the connection of a microphone  
• Up to five microphones can be connected with the Data Solution Box.  
• When using external microphones, the sound transmitted to the remote party  
may become unclear due to noises in a conferencing room. In this case speak  
close to the microphone.  
• When using multiple microphones, the Echo Canceler function cannot be  
fully utilized depending on the type of conference room. In this case, try to  
suppress any echo in the room or decrease the number of microphones.  
• You cannot use the microphones connected to the Data Solution Box  
together with those connected to the Communication Terminal or the built-  
in microphone.  
144 Connection Example Using the Data Solution Box  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the CTE-600 Communication Transducer  
to an input/output connector  
Cable (supplied  
Interface box  
with the CTE-600)  
(supplied with the CTE-600)  
to DC 6V  
AC adaptor  
CTE-600  
to LINE  
IN  
(supplied with  
the CTE-600)  
to LINE  
OUT  
to a wall  
outlet  
Cable (not supplied)  
to an input/output  
connector  
to AUX IN  
to AUX OUT  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box (Rear)  
To use the Communication Transducer connected to the Data Solution Box  
• Set “CTE” on page 1 of the Audio Setup menu to “DSB AUX IN” (page 50).  
• Set the SYSTEM SELECT switch at the bottom of the Communication  
Transducer to “PCS”.  
Note  
You cannot use two or more Communication Transducers in a room and cannot use it  
together with other microphones.  
For detailed information on the Communication Transducer, refer to the  
Operating Instructions that come with the Communication Transducer.  
Connection Example Using the Data Solution Box 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Audio/Video Signal from the  
Connected Equipment for a Conference  
Setting Before Conferencing  
To use a microphone connected to the Data Solution Box  
Set “Mic Select” to “DSB MIC” on page 1 of the Audio Setup menu (page 50).  
To use a projector, etc. connected to the RGB OUT connector on the Data  
Solution Box  
Set “Connection” to “RGB OUT (DSB)” on page 1 of “Monitor Out” on the  
Video Setup menu (page 52).  
Operating the System During a Conference  
To select a picture from a computer connected to the Data Solution Box  
When using the buttons on the Data Solution Box  
Press the RGB A or RGB B button on the upper panel of the Data Solution  
Box.  
To select the picture from the computer connected to the RGB IN A connector,  
press the RGB IN A button, or the RGB IN B button to select that from the  
computer connected to the RGB IN B connector.  
The indicator of the selected button lights.  
RGB A button  
RGB B button  
When using the Remote Commander  
1 Press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button on the Remote Commander.  
The Video Input Select menu appears.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the “RGB  
A” or “RGB B” input from “DSB Input”.  
RGB A: Select the picture from the computer connected to the RGB IN A  
connector.  
146 Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
RGB B: Select the picture from the computer connected to the RGB IN B  
connector.  
Video Input Select  
Local1  
Local2  
Main  
Split  
Off  
Far  
DSB Input  
RGB A  
Main  
3 Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.  
The indicator of the RGB A or RGB B button on the upper panel of the Data  
Solution Box lights according to the selected input.  
Note  
Even if you select the input with the buttons on the Data Solution Box, the display in  
the Video Input Select menu will not change.  
To transmit a picture from a computer connected to the Data Solution Box  
Press the SEND button on the upper panel of the Data Solution Box.  
The indicator on the SEND button lights and the picture of the equipment  
selected with the RGB A or RGB B button or the VIDEO INPUT SELECT  
button is displayed on the projector, etc. connected to the RGB OUT connector  
on the Data Solution Box. While in communication, the picture selected on the  
Such computer picture is displayed without any conversion as input to the Data  
Solution Box. The detailed portion of the picture transmitted to the remote  
party may not be clearly seen and the number of frames may be reduced.  
For details on picture quality, see “Picture quality of the data solution box”  
on page 148.  
For picture transmission using the Remote Commander, see page 121.  
SEND button  
Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
While you are transmitting the computer picture, you cannot receive a still image or a  
computer picture from any other terminal. Ending your transmission enables you to  
receive it. When you are receiving a still image or computer picture from any other  
terminal, you cannot transmit a computer picture from equipment connected to the Data  
Solution Box.  
To transmit the picture from a computer to multiple points  
If you install the optional PCSA-M3G70 H.323 (for LAN) or PCSA-M0G70  
H.320 (for ISDN) MCU software, you can transmit the picture from the  
computer to multiple points.  
Picture quality of the data solution box  
The picture quality received by the remote party varies depending on the type  
of the terminal or connecting method, or “Monitor Out (or Sub Monitor Out)”  
setting on the remote site. Using the Data Solution Box on the remote site  
enables receipt of a high-quality computer picture with larger number of  
frames.  
148 Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the PCS-PG70/PG70P is used as a receiving terminal  
Monitor used to  
Output  
Resolution Video  
Picture quality  
display the picture of connector for a  
frame  
rate  
the Data solution Box computer  
picture on  
receiving  
terminal  
VIDEO OUT 1 or  
VIDEO OUT 2  
VIDEO OUT 1  
or VIDEO OUT  
2 on the PCS-  
PG70/PG70P  
a
a
Outputs the signal by  
converting a transmitted  
VGA, SVGA or XGA signal  
into a 4CIF signal. The  
original high-resolution  
picture cannot be obtained  
and details cannot be clearly  
seen. The number of frames  
displayed per second  
depends on the interface  
transmission rate. For  
example, one frame per  
second is obtained at 1 Mbps.  
RGB OUT  
RGB OUT  
on the  
PCS-PG70/  
a
Outputs the signal by  
converting a transmitted  
VGA, SVGA or XGA signal  
into an XGA signal. The  
high-resolution picture can  
be obtained. The number of  
frames displayed per second  
depends on the interface  
transmission rate. For  
PG70P  
example, one frame per  
second is obtained at 1 Mbps.  
DSB  
RGB OUT  
Outputs the signal by  
on the  
converting a transmitted  
VGA, SVGA or XGA signal  
into an XGA signal. The  
high-resolution picture can  
be obtained. You can view  
more vivid picture than the  
picture output from the RGB  
OUT connector on the  
PCSA-DSB1S  
(only when the  
PCSA-DSB1S  
is enabled)  
Communication Terminal.  
The number of frames  
displayed per second  
depends on the interface  
transmission rates. For  
: High, a: Middle, f: Low  
For details about the settings concerning video output from each output  
connector, see “Displaying the Picture on a Projector or Monitor” on page  
151, and the Video Setup menu “Monitor Out” on page 52.  
Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the PCS-11/11P is used as a receiving terminal  
Resolution Video Remarks  
frame  
rate  
a
Outputs the signal by converting a transmitted VGA, SVGA or XGA  
signal into a 4CIF signal. The original high-resolution picture cannot be  
obtained and details cannot be clearly seen. The number of frames  
displayed per second depends on the interface transmission rate. For  
example, one frame per second is obtained at 1 Mbps.  
a
: High, a: Middle, f: Low  
When a videoconferencing system other than the PCS-G70/G70P or  
PCS-11/11P such as the PCS-1600 is used  
Resolution Video Remarks  
frame  
rate  
a
Sends and receives the pictures in 4CIF, and the original high-resolution  
picture cannot be obtained and detailed portion cannot be clearly seen.  
The number of frames displayed per second depends on the interface  
transmission rates. For example, one frame per several seconds is  
obtained.  
f
: High, a: Middle, f: Low  
150 Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the Picture on a Projector or  
Monitor  
When you connect the Data Solution Box to the Communication Terminal,  
connections with external monitors, etc. using the following four outputs are  
available. The connections allow output of the picture to one, two or three  
monitors selected from among four.  
Monitor A  
Monitor B  
to VIDEO OUT  
MONITOR 2  
to VIDEO OUT  
MONITOR 1  
to RGB OUT  
to RGB OUT on the  
PCSA-DSB1S  
Monitor C  
Monitor D  
Outputting the Signal to One Monitor  
Select the output with “Monitor Out” in the Video Setup menu.  
VIDEO 1: Outputs the signal to the monitor (monitor A in the illustration  
above) connected to the VIDEO OUT MONITOR 1 connector of the  
Communication Terminal.  
VIDEO 2: Outputs the signal to the monitor (monitor B in the illustration  
above) connected to the VIDEO OUT MONITOR 2 connector of the  
Communication Terminal.  
RGB OUT: Outputs the signal to the monitor (monitor C in the illustration  
above) connected to the RGB OUT connector of the Communication  
Terminal.  
Displaying the Picture on a Projector or Monitor 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RGB OUT (DSB): Outputs the signal to a monitor (monitor D in the  
illustration above) connected to the RGB OUT connector of the Data  
Solution Box.  
When connecting a monitor to the RGB OUT connector on the  
Data Solution Box  
The menus may not be displayed. In this case, change the setup of your system  
as described below.  
1
Connect your monitor to the RGB OUT connector of the Communication  
Terminal.  
2
3
Set “Connection” in the Video Setup menu to “RGB OUT (DSB)”.  
Reconnect the monitor to the RGB OUT connector of the Data Solution  
Box.  
Outputting the Signal to the Second or Third Monitor  
The first monitor for displaying motion pictures is fixed to the monitor  
connected to the VIDEO OUT MONITOR 1 connector of the Communication  
Terminal (monitor A in the illustration of the previous page).  
Select the output to the second and third monitors with “Connection” in the  
Video Setup menu.  
VIDEO OUT2: Outputs the signal to the monitor connected to the VIDEO  
OUT MONITOR 2 connector (monitor B in the illustration of the previous  
page) of the Communication Terminal.  
RGB OUT: Outputs the signal to the monitor (monitor C in the illustration of  
the previous page) connected to the RGB OUT connector of the  
Communication Terminal.  
DSB: Outputs the signal to the monitor (monitor D in the illustration of the  
previous page) connected to the RGB OUT connector of the Data Solution  
Box.  
152 Displaying the Picture on a Projector or Monitor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6:  
Videoconference  
Using a  
Whiteboard  
This chapter describes how to use your whiteboard for your videoconferencing  
system.  
You can transmit and receive notes written on the whiteboard in real-time in a  
videoconference. You can also store the transmitted or received data in a  
Memory Stick as still images.  
Your whiteboard is usable for a videoconference only when the optional  
mimio Xi* is used together with the system.  
For product information on the mimio Xi, contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
®
* mimio is a registered trademark of Virtual Ink Corporation of the United States.  
minio Xi is a trademark of Virtual Ink Corporation of the United States.  
Note  
Videoconferencing using the whiteboard is available only between PCS-G70/G70P  
systems or when a receiving terminal is PCS-11/11P. You cannot use this function  
with other Sony videoconferencing systems such as PCS-1600, or other manufacturers’  
systems.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connection Example With a Whiteboard  
Notes  
• Be sure to turn off all the equipment before making any connections.  
• Do not connect/disconnect the cable with the power on. Doing so may damage the  
Camera Unit, Communication Terminal or mimio Xi.  
Whiteboard  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
AUX  
MONITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
to WHITE BOARD  
Dedicated cable  
(supplied with the mimio Xi)  
mimio Xi capture bar  
Notes on using the mimio Xi  
• Do not use any cable other than the dedicated cable supplied with the  
recorder.  
• Attach the capture bar at the upper left corner of the whiteboard.  
• Use only the stylus, marker and eraser that come with the mimio Xi for  
writing on a whiteboard.  
• Do not connect a device other than the mimio Xi to the WHITE BOARD  
connector on the Communication Terminal.  
154 Connection Example With a Whiteboard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attaching the mimio Xi on the  
Whiteboard  
Attach the mimio Xi at the upper left corner of a whiteboard vertically or  
horizontally, then set the attachment orientation of the mimio Xi and the size  
of the whiteboard using the menu.  
Vertically  
Horizontally  
To set the attachment orientation of the mimio-Xi  
According to the orientation of the mimio Xi, set “Whiteboard Attachment” to  
“Vertical” or “Horizontal” in “Whiteboard” of the General Setup menu (page  
53).  
To specify the whiteboard size to be used  
After selecting “Inches” or “Meters” from “Whiteboard Size Measurement” in  
“Whiteboard” of the General Setup menu, select the size of the whiteboard  
from “Whiteboard Size” (page 56).  
You can select one of the following sizes (height × width):  
When you attach the mimio Xi vertically  
2'0" × 3'0" (0.6 × 0.9 m), 3'0" × 4'0" (0.9 × 1.2 m), 4'0" × 6'0" (1.2 × 1.8 m),  
4'0" × 8'0" (1.2 × 2.4 m)  
When you attach the mimio Xi horizontally  
3'0" × 2'0" (0.9 × 0.6 m), 4'0" × 3'0" (1.2 × 0.9 m), 6'0" × 4'0" (1.8 × 1.2 m),  
8'0" × 4'0" (2.4 × 1.2 m)  
Attaching the mimio Xi on the Whiteboard 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Conducting a Videoconference Using a  
Whiteboard  
P
O
W
E
R
POWER  
P
O
W
E
R
LAN or ISDN  
P
O
W
E
R
1 Start the videoconference.  
2 When you intend to send the whiteboard picture, press the PUSH ENTER  
button on the Remote Commander to display the communication submenu  
on the monitor screen.  
Communication submenu  
Phone Book  
Dual Video  
Presentation  
Whiteboard  
Send  
Save  
Reject Answer  
Icon display  
End  
3 Press the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Whiteboard  
”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The whiteboard picture and icon appears on the monitors of both the local and  
remote parties.  
When the local party uses the dual monitor mode, it will be displayed on the  
sub-monitor (second monitor).  
156 Conducting a Videoconference Using a Whiteboard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Local monitor screen  
Remote monitor screen  
4 Write anything using the stylus, marker or eraser that come with the mimio  
Xi on the whiteboard.  
The notes you are writing are displayed in real-time on the remote and local  
monitor screens.  
Monitors on the local and remote  
parties  
Whiteboard  
Notes  
• Only one whiteboard can be used at a time. If more than two terminals use the  
whiteboard with the mimio Xi connected, the whiteboard picture written by the party  
who has turned on the whiteboard first will be displayed on the monitors of all the  
terminals.  
• Set both “Far End Camera Control” on page 3 of the Communication Setup menu  
(page 48) to “On”. The whiteboard cannot be used for a videoconference this item  
items are set to “On” for all the participating terminals.  
• If a party joins in during the middle of the multipoint conference using a whiteboard,  
the monitor of the party displays only the whiteboard picture written from that time.  
The pictures transmitted before participation are not displayed on his monitor.  
Conducting a Videoconference Using a Whiteboard 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To store the notes written on the whiteboard  
Display the communication submenu and then select “Save”.  
The whiteboard picture displayed on the monitor will be stored in the  
“Memory Stick” as a still image.  
Phone Book  
Dual Video  
Presentation  
Whiteboard  
Send  
Save  
Reject Answer  
Icon display  
End  
To exit from the whiteboard mode  
The whiteboard user should open the communication submenu, select  
“Whiteboard ”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The pictures displayed on the monitors of all the terminals switch to the normal  
camera pictures.  
Under this circumstance, any terminal may turn on the whiteboard.  
Phone Book  
Dual Video  
Presentation  
Whiteboard  
Send  
Save  
Reject Answer  
Icon display  
End  
Note  
Once the conference has ended, you cannot display the notes written on the monitor  
screen. If you want to do so, storing the notes on a “Memory Stick” is recommended.  
See “To store the notes written on the whiteboard”.  
158 Conducting a Videoconference Using a Whiteboard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7:  
Encrypted  
Videoconference  
via LAN  
When a highly confidential videoconference is required or a videoconference  
is held via internet, the Video Communication System enables transmission  
and reception of encrypted video, audio and data output from the Data Solution  
Box between the systems identified as the same password. Conducting a  
videoconference using this feature is known as an encrypted videoconference  
via LAN.  
This chapter describes how to conduct an encrypted videoconference via LAN.  
The encrypted videoconference via LAN is available only among PCS-G70/  
G70P Video Communication Systems or between PCS-G70/G70P and remote  
parties (receiver) using PCS-11/11P, PCS-1/1P or PCS-TL50/TL50P Video  
Communication Systems connected via LAN. You cannot conduct an  
encrypted videoconference if the system is connected via an ISDN, via ISDN  
& LAN, or with Sony video communication systems other than the PCS-G70/  
G70P, PCS-11/11P, PCS-1/1P or PCS-TL50/50P, or with other manufacturers'  
videoconferencing systems.  
The encryption feature can also be used in multipoint conference using LAN  
connection (including the cascade connection via LAN).  
Note  
In an encrypted conference only video signals, audio signals and RGB signals from a  
computer connected to the Data Solution Box are encrypted. Camera control signals (for  
controlling the other party’s camera) and whiteboard pictures cannot be encrypted.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparing for an Encrypted  
Videoconference via LAN  
To start an encrypted videoconference, each terminal has to set the same  
password and set “Encryption via LAN” to “On” in the LAN Setup menu.  
LAN  
Encryption via LAN  
Page:  
1/1  
Encryption via LAN  
On  
Encryption Password  
Save  
Cancel  
1 Enter a password using 13 to 20 alphabetical characters, numbers, or  
symbols.  
2 Select “On” for “Encryption via LAN” in the LAN Setup menu.  
For details on setting, see “Encryption via LAN Page 1/1” on page 63.  
Notes  
• If you set “Encryption via LAN” to “On”, you cannot connect to a terminal that is not  
equipped with the encryption feature to a terminal with “Encryption via LAN” set to  
“Off”, or to a terminal without the same password as that of your system.  
• You can conduct a videoconference without an encryption feature with a terminal  
connected via an ISDN even if you set “Encryption via LAN” to “On”.  
160 Preparing for an Encrypted Videoconference via LAN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting an Encrypted Videoconference  
via LAN  
You can start an encrypted videoconference via LAN by calling a remote party  
in the same manner as a daily videoconference.  
During an encrypted videoconference via LAN, the  
displayed on the screen.  
(encryption) icon is  
Notes  
• When the  
icon is not displayed on the screen, transmission and reception data  
will not be encrypted. Be sure to confirm if the  
an encrypted videoconference.  
icon is displayed before starting  
• As the encryption feature is not available for a terminal connected via an ISDN, the  
icon does not appear on the screen of such a terminal.  
When the encrypted videoconference via LAN is disabled  
If the following message appears when you call a remote party, an encrypted  
videoconference via LAN is not available.  
Error Messages  
Causes  
The encryption feature on a far-  
end system is disabled.  
The encryption feature via LAN on the remote  
system is disabled.  
The entered password for the  
The password entered on the remote system is  
encryption feature is not correct. not the same as that on the local system.  
The encrypted videoconference is While the videoconference is held via an ISDN  
not available if any terminal is  
connected via ISDN.  
connection, you cannot connect any terminal via  
the LAN connection if your encryption via LAN  
feature is activated.  
Starting an Encrypted Videoconference via LAN 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8:  
Multipoint  
Videoconference  
This chapter describes how to conduct a multipoint videoconference.  
For conducting a multipoint videoconference, installation of the optional  
PCSA-M3G70 MCU software (for LAN connection) based on the H.323  
standard or the optional PCSA-M0G70 MCU software (for ISDN connection)  
based on the H.320 standard is required.  
Multipoint videoconference among up to ten points including the local site is  
available when connecting via a LAN.  
When connecting via ISDN lines, you can conduct a multipoint  
videoconference among up to six points including the local site. You can use  
a normal phone at up to five points over ISDN.  
A multipoint videoconference using the ISDN and LAN connections mixed is  
also available.  
Restrictions on the use of the MCU software  
• When a multipoint videoconference is held via LAN, the bandwidth is  
automatically set so that the total value of all the points is 4 Mbps at  
maximum. The bit rate for each point varies with the points you connect.  
• When a multipoint videoconference is held via ISDN, the same number of  
channels should be used on all the points and the total channels are up to 12B.  
• The supported video modes are H.264, H.263, and H.261 only.  
• The supported audio modes are G.711, G.722, G.728, and MPEG4 AAC  
only.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connection Examples for a Multipoint  
Videoconference  
Using the LAN Connection (Up to 6 Points)  
Installing the optional PCSA-M3G70 H.323MCU software in a  
Communication Terminal allows you to conduct multipoint videoconferences  
with up to six points.  
Connecting five monitors allows you to display several points on the monitors.  
The point names are displayed on-screen.  
If you are already conducting a two-point videoconference when a third point  
call, the system automatically opens a multipoint conference. This is referred  
as the “on-the-fly” function.  
P
O
W
E
R
PCSA-M3G70  
P
O
W
E
R
H.323 MCU  
software  
P
O
W
E
R
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
2
P
O
W
E
R
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
AUX  
MONITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
to 100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
P
O
W
E
R
UTP cable (category 5, straight)  
(not supplied)  
to LAN  
LAN  
Note  
For a multipoint videoconference only the Communication Terminal in which the  
PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software can be installed is used as main terminal. If you  
want to use multiple Communication Terminals as main terminals depending on the  
type of conference, the same number of H.323 MCU software as that of the main  
terminals is required.  
Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Cascade Connection via LAN (Up to 10 Points)  
Installing the optional PCSA-M3G70 H.323MCU software in two  
Communication Terminals enables cascade connection, allowing you to  
conduct a multipoint videoconference with up to ten points.  
PCSA-M3G70 H.323  
PCSA-  
M3G70  
MCU software  
H.323 MCU  
software  
to LAN  
POWER  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
P
O
W
E
R
P
O
W
E
R
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
AUX  
MONITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
POWER  
POWER  
POWER  
POWER  
POWER  
POWER  
to 100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
UTP cable (category 5,  
straight) (not supplied)  
LAN  
LAN  
Notes  
• Installing the PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software into three or more  
Communication Terminals does not allow cascade connection. Note that the third or  
later terminals should set “Multipoint Mode” to “Off” on page 4 of the  
Communication Setup menu.  
• For cascade connection, the “Split” and “Split (Fixed)” modes are not available. Only  
the “Voice Activate” mode is available.  
164 Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the ISDN Connection  
Installing the optional PCSA-M0G70 H.320MCU software in one  
Communication Terminal allows you to conduct a multipoint videoconference  
with up to six points by using the optional PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S, or  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit.  
* The illustration shows an example using  
the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.  
PCSA-M0G70  
H.320 MCU  
software  
PCSA-B384S,  
PCSA-B768S, or  
PCSA-PRI ISDN  
Unit  
to ISDN 1-6  
ISDN modular cables  
(not supplied)  
to ISDN lines  
Notes on the number of ISDN lines used and number of remote  
parties for a multipoint conference  
You can select the number of ISDN channels to be used for connecting the first  
remote point using “Number of Lines” in the Communication menu.  
The number of connectable remote points is defined by the number of ISDN  
lines used and the “Number of Lines” setting. For example, when you use three  
ISDN lines (up to 6B channels are usable) and set the menu to “4B (256K),”  
4B channels are used for the first remote point connection, and the remaining  
2B channels are used for the second remote point connection.  
Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
When you are called from a remote party and the remote party has set a lower number  
of ISDN channels than that in this terminal, the setting on the remote party’s terminal  
has priority.  
To connect with a normal phone  
When you are using an ISDN connection, a normal phone can be connected at  
up to five points.  
Only the 1B (64K) connection is available for a normal phone.  
Notes  
• When using the ISDN connections, installing the PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU  
software into two or more Communication Terminals does not allow cascade  
connection.  
• For a multipoint videoconference only the Communication Terminal in which the  
PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software is installed is used as the main terminal. If you  
want to use two or more Communication Terminals as main terminals depending on  
the type of conference, the same number of H.320 MCU software as that of the main  
terminals is required.  
166 Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Both LAN and ISDN  
Installing both the PCSA-M3G70 H.323 and PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU  
software in one Communication Terminal enables conduct of a multipoint  
videoconference with the terminals connected via a LAN and ISDN.  
PCSA-M3G70  
H.323 and  
PCSA-M0G70  
H.320 MCU  
software  
* The illustration shows an example using  
the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.  
PCSA-B384S,  
PCSA-B768S,  
or PCSA-PRI  
ISDN Unit  
to 100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
to ISDN 1- 6  
ISDN modular  
cable  
(not supplied)  
UTP cable (category 5,  
straight) (not supplied)  
to ISDN line  
to LAN  
Note  
The connection example above includes four terminals via the LAN connection and one  
terminal via the ISDN connection. There is no limitation on the number of LAN and  
ISDN connections.  
Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the LAN and ISDN cascade connection  
Installing both the PCSA-M3G70 H.323 and PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU  
software in two Communication Terminals enables cascade connection  
including two main terminals. Connecting four terminals to one main terminal  
allows you to conduct a multipoint videoconference via a LAN and ISDN with  
up to ten points.  
*
LAN  
PCSA-M3G70  
PCSA-M0G70  
PCSA-M3G70  
PCSA-M0G70  
*Be sure to connect two Communication Terminals, with the MCU software installed, via a LAN.  
Note  
Be sure to make connection between two Communication Terminals via LAN. Even if  
the PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software is installed in both the Terminals, cascade  
connection via an ISDN is not available.  
168 Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the MCU Software  
Notes on installing the MCU software  
• You cannot install the software if the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick  
where the MCU software is stored is set to “LOCK”.  
• Once the MCU software is installed in the Communication Terminal, the  
software is not used again.  
• You cannot install MCU software that was copied to another Memory Stick  
with a computer, etc.  
1 Open the front panel of the Communication Terminal, and then slide the  
power switch on the right to the off position ({).  
2 Insert the “Memory Stick” containing the PCSA-M3G70 or PCSA-M0G70  
MCU software into the Memory Stick slot.  
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the direction of the arrow with the mark facing  
upward.  
PCSA-M3G70 or PCSA-M0G70 MCU software  
3 Slide the power switch on the right to the off position (@).  
The MCU software is installed in the Communication Terminal.  
Installing the MCU Software 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To check if the installation of the software is complete  
Press the launcher's Information button to display the information. When a  
multipoint mode icon appears, the MCU software is installed correctly. If the  
“Multipoint Mode” is “On”, the icon is highlighted.  
Phone Book  
Information  
il Dial  
Tokyo  
PORT  
ry  
IP: 012.345.678.912  
Video: Object  
ISDN: 012345678912  
Audio: MIC(INT)+AUX  
New York  
u  
OK  
ation  
ISDN: 012345678956789  
Paris  
AUTO  
Dial  
Multipoint mode icon  
The installed software in the Information menu.  
For details on the Information menu, see “Using the Launcher Menu” on page  
75.  
170 Installing the MCU Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting for a Multipoint  
Videoconference  
Communication Setup menu  
You can configure various multipoint videoconferencing settings in the  
Communication Setup menu.  
1 Set the “Multipoint Mode” on page 4 of the Communication Setup menu  
to “On”.  
Transmission Mode  
Page:  
4/4  
Multipoint Mode  
On  
Broadcast Mode  
Split  
Split  
Automatic  
Full Screen  
Sender Screen  
Save  
Cancel  
2 Select the number of ISDN channels to be used for connecting with the first  
remote point of a multipoint videoconference in “Number of Lines” on  
page 1 of Communication Setup menu. The number of connectable remote  
points is defined by the selected number of channels and the number of  
ISDN lines used.  
Communication  
Page:  
1/3  
Indivisual Settings  
Number of Lines  
LAN Bandwidth  
Off  
1B  
64Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
Setting for a Multipoint Videoconference 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Select the LAN bandwidth to be used for multipoint videoconferencing in  
“LAN Bandwidth” on page 1 of the Communication Setup menu.  
Communication  
Page:  
1/3  
Indivisual Settings  
Number of Lines  
LAN Bandwidth  
Off  
1B  
64Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
172 Setting for a Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering the Remote Parties in the Multipoint Connection List  
You can register the multipoint connection list that includes all remote parties  
for a multipoint videoconference in the Phone Book. It allows you to dial all  
the parties simultaneously.  
You can enter new remote parties to register the multipoint connection list, or  
add the parties registered in the Phone Book to the multipoint connection list.  
To register a multipoint connection list in the Phone Book  
The basic procedure for registration is the same as the registration of a remote  
party for a point-to-point videoconference.  
For details on the procedure, see “Registering a New Remote Party” on page  
68.  
1 Select “New Entry” in the Phone Book menu to display the List Edit menu,  
then enter the name of the multipoint connection list in the Index text box.  
For details on entry, see steps 1 to 3 “Registering a New Remote Party”  
on page 68.  
List Edit  
IP  
Index MULTI LIST  
Line I/F  
IP  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
2 Select “Multipoint” under “Line I/F”.  
List Edit  
IP  
ISDN  
ISDN (Telephone)  
Multipoint  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
3 Select the line interface icon or a still image to be displayed in the Phone  
Book.  
The icon is shown as “  
”.  
4 Set up the line interface of the remote parties.  
When PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (for LAN) is installed  
Select “IP”, and enter the IP addresses of all the parties for the multipoint  
videoconference in text boxes A to E.  
Setting for a Multipoint Videoconference 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software (for ISDN) is installed  
Select “ISDN” or “ISDN (Telephone)”, and enter the line numbers or phone  
numbers of all the parties for the multipoint videoconference in text boxes A to E.  
When both PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (for LAN) and PCSA-  
M0G70 H.320 MCU software (for ISDN) are installed  
Select Multipoint and a drop-down list is displayed to the right of text boxes A to E.  
When using a LAN, enter the IP address, and select “IP” from the drop-down list.  
When using ISDN, enter the line number, and select “ISDN” from the drop-  
down list.  
When using ISDN (Telephone), enter the telephone number, and select “ISDN  
(Telephone)” from the drop-down list.  
Enter all the parties for the multipoint videoconference.  
List Edit  
A1  
A2  
B1  
B2  
C2  
IP  
IP  
IP  
IP  
IP  
IP  
Index MULTI LIST2  
Line I/F  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
For details on the setups, see step 5 in “Registering a New Remote Party”  
on page 68.  
5 Press the V or v button to select “Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
The registration of the multipoint connection list is completed.  
To specify a remote party registered in the Phone Book to the multipoint  
connection list  
1 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the name  
you want to register in the multipoint connection list.  
2 Press the  
button on the Remote Commander, or press the PUSH  
ENTER button to open the submenu, press the V or v button to select “  
On”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
J-S  
T-Z  
On  
AUTO  
Paris  
Dial  
S
Mary  
H.Q  
Edit  
Copy  
Delete  
Cancel  
Conf. B  
Recent  
Osaka  
New Entry  
Cancel  
174 Setting for a Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The  
(multipoint) mark is added to the upper right of the selected name in  
the list and the remote party is registered in the multipoint connection list.  
You can add the  
above. The  
marks for up to five parties using the same procedure as  
marks are displayed at the upper right corner of the Phone  
Book, showing how many points you registered for a multipoint connection.  
Number of registered points  
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
AUTO  
J-S  
Smith  
Suziki  
H.Q  
Paris  
T-Z  
Recent  
Conf. B  
Osaka  
New Entry  
Cancel  
Multipoint mark  
Note  
To delete the  
mark from the name list, press the  
button again, or press the  
PUSH ENTER button to open the submenu, press the V or v button to select “  
Off”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
3 Select one of the remote parties with the  
mark, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
4 Press the V or v button to select “  
Edit” from the submenu, then press  
the PUSH ENTER button.  
The List Edit menu appears. All the IP addresses or telephone numbers of the  
parties marked with are entered in the number text boxes.  
List Edit  
A
B
C
D
E
192.168.159.1  
IP  
IP  
IP  
IP  
IP  
192.168.159.2  
192.168.159.3  
192.168.159.4  
192.168.159.5  
Index  
Line I/F  
Multipoint  
LAN Bandwidth  
1024 Kbps  
Save  
Cancel  
5 Enter the name of the multipoint connection list in the Index text box.  
6 Select “Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The registration of the multipoint connection list is completed.  
Setting for a Multipoint Videoconference 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting a Multipoint Videoconference  
Calling Remote Parties  
To call remote parties registered in the multipoint connection lists  
1 Select the multipoint connection list registered in the Phone Book.  
The multipoint connection lists are marked with “  
IP”.  
2 Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
/
) button on the Remote  
Commander, or press the PUSH ENTER button to display the submenu,  
press the V or v button to select “  
button.  
Dial”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
J-S  
T-Z  
On  
Dial  
Edit  
AUTO  
Paris  
S
Mary  
H.Q  
Copy  
Delete  
Cancel  
Recent  
Conf. B  
Osaka  
New Entry  
Cancel  
The system begins dialing the numbers of the remote parties registered in the  
multipoint connection list. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen, and the  
ON LINE indicator (blue) on the Communication Terminal blinks.  
When the system connects to all the remote points, the message “Meeting  
starts!” appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops blinking and  
lights.  
To call remote parties by selecting from the Phone Book  
1 Select a remote party to which you want to connect for a multipoint  
videoconference from the Phone Book.  
2 Press the  
button on the Remote Commander, or press the PUSH  
ENTER button to open the submenu, press the V or v button to select “  
On”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
176 Starting a Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
J-S  
T-Z  
On  
AUTO  
Paris  
Dial  
S
Mary  
H.Q  
Edit  
Copy  
Delete  
Cancel  
Conf. B  
Recent  
Osaka  
New Entry  
Cancel  
The  
(multipoint) mark is added to the upper left of the selected name in the  
Phone Book list and the remote party is specified to the party for multipoint  
connection.  
You can add the  
above. The  
marks for up to five parties using the same procedure as  
marks added are displayed at the upper right corner of the  
Phone Book menu.  
Number of specified points  
Phone Book  
0-9  
A-1  
J-S  
T-Z  
AUTO  
Paris  
Smith  
Suziki  
H.Q  
Recent  
Conf. B  
Osaka  
New Entry  
Cancel  
Multipoint mark  
Note  
To delete the  
mark from the name list, press the  
button again, or press the PUSH  
ENTER button to open the submenu, press the V or v button to select “  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Off”, then  
3 Select one of the remote parties with the  
mark.  
) button on the Remote  
4 Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
/
Commander, or press the PUSH ENTER button to open the submenu, press  
the V or v button to select “ Dial”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Starting a Multipoint Videoconference 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system begins dialing the number of the remote party with the  
marks.  
Dialing”appears on the monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator (blue) on  
the Communication Terminal blinks.  
When the system connects to all the parties, the message “Meeting starts!”  
To call remote parties not registered in the Phone Book  
Basic operations are the same as those for starting a point-to-point conference.  
For details, see “To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book” on  
page 79.  
1 Select “Detail Dial” in the launcher menu to open the Detail Dial menu.  
2 Select the multipoint connection under “Line I/F”.  
Detail Dial  
Line I/F  
IP  
IP  
ISDN  
ISDN(2B)  
ISDN (Telephone)  
Multipoint  
Dial  
Save  
Cancel  
3 Set up the line interface of the remote parties.  
When PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (for LAN) is installed  
Select “IP”, and enter the IP addresses of all the parties for the multipoint  
videoconference in text boxes A to E.  
When PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU software (for ISDN) is installed  
Select “ISDN” or “ISDN (Telephone)”, and enter the line numbers or  
phone numbers of all the parties for the multipoint videoconference in text  
boxes A to E.  
When both PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU software (for LAN) and PCSA-  
M0G70 H.320 MCU software (for ISDN) are installed  
Select Multipoint and a drop-down list is displayed to the right of text  
boxes A to E.  
When using a LAN, enter the IP address, and select “IP” from the drop-  
down list.  
When using ISDN, enter the line number, and select “ISDN” from the  
drop-down list.  
When using ISDN (Telephone), enter the telephone number, and select  
“ISDN (Telephone)” from the drop-down list.  
Enter all the parties for the multipoint videoconference.  
178 Starting a Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Detail Dial  
Line I/F  
Multipoint  
A
B
C
D
E
IP  
IP  
IP  
IP  
IP  
Dial  
Save  
Cancel  
For details on the setups, see step 3 in “To call a remote party not  
registered in the Phone Book” on page 79.  
4 Select “Dial”, and press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote  
Commander. You can also press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
button on the Remote Commander.  
/
)
The system begins dialing the numbers selected in step 3. “Dialing” appears  
on the monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator (blue) on the  
Communication Terminal blinks.  
When the system connects to all the remote parties, the message “Meeting  
starts!” appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops blinking and  
lights.  
To call additional remote parties  
After starting communication with the remote party selected first, press the  
CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
open the submenu.  
/
) button on the Remote Commander to  
Disconnect  
Phone Book  
Detail Dial  
Cancel  
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure shown in “To call remote parties  
by selecting from the Phone Book” on page 176 or steps 1 through 4 of the  
procedure in “To call remote parties not registered in the Phone Book” on page  
178 depending on the registration status of each remote party.  
Starting a Multipoint Videoconference 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If some points are not connected  
The following dialog appears. Select the desired item.  
Some Positions were not connected.  
A
B
C
D
E
Status  
XX YY  
Cause Code  
Start Meeting  
Disconnect All  
Redial  
Start Meeting: Starts a conference with remote parties connected.  
Disconnect All: Cancels all the connections and restores the launcher menu.  
Redial: Redials the numbers of the points that you failed to connect.  
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party  
Operations are the same as those for a point-to-point conference.  
For details, see “Receiving a Call from a Remote Party” on page 87.  
180 Starting a Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Display Control  
During a multipoint videoconference with the MCU software installed in the  
communication Terminal you can control the following operations.  
What is “Broadcast Mode”?  
You can use the “Split”, “Split (Fixed)”, “Voice Activate” and “Broadcast”  
modes.  
Split mode  
This mode allows display of the pictures from the connected remote terminals  
and the picture of the local terminal by splitting the monitor screen.  
The display is split into six, regardless of the number of terminals. You can  
also use “Automatic” to split the screen into four or six depending on the  
number of terminals. When there are up to three terminals, the display is  
automatically split into four. When there are four or five terminals, the display  
is automatically split into six.  
Pictures A to C or A to E appear in connection order.  
Four-split window  
Picture A  
Six-split window  
Picture A  
Picture B  
Picture B  
Picture C  
Picture D  
Picture E  
Picture on the local Picture C  
site  
Picture on the local site  
Notes  
• When the six-split window is displayed, the system detects the terminal including the  
loudest sound among all the terminals and displays the picture of that terminal in the  
lower right window. The picture on the local site is then displayed in the window  
where the picture of the detected terminal was displayed.  
• If you switch the broadcast mode from Split mode to Voice Activate mode in which  
a picture of a specified terminal is shown in full screen during communication, the  
location of Pictures A to E will be changed when the Split mode is restored.  
• When the six-split window is displayed, the picture on the local site is always  
displayed in the lower right window.  
• When your system is in the Split or Split (Fixed) mode, you cannot control the camera  
on any connected remote terminals.  
Using the Display Control 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Split (Fixed) mode  
The pictures from the connected remote terminals and the picture of the local  
terminal are displayed by splitting the monitor screen as the same manner as  
those in the split mode.  
You can specify a picture among the split windows to fix it in the lower right  
window for the six-split mode. Pictures other than the specified one will be  
displayed in the split windows in order of connecting.  
Six-split window  
The picture of the specified terminal is  
always displayed in this window.  
Voice Activate mode  
Detects the terminal with the speaker with the loudest voice among the  
connected terminals, and displays the picture of that terminal in full screen on  
all the sites. The “V.A” indicator appears when the Voice Activate mode is  
activated. The  
indicator with alphabet showing the terminal of the  
displayed picture also appears. The  
picture is broadcast.  
indicator is displayed while the local  
Broadcast mode  
You can specify the terminal to display the picture of that terminal in full  
screen on all the sites. The indicator with alphabet showing the terminal  
of the displayed picture also appears. The  
local picture is broadcast.  
indicator is displayed while the  
182 Using the Display Control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Broadcast Modes and Displayed Windows  
The chart described below shows the window displayed on the monitor screen  
when you select one of the Broadcast Modes. According to the connection  
status of your system, some modes cannot be selected. In the connection status  
with no window shown in the chart, the corresponding mode is not available.  
Connection status  
Non-cascade connection  
LAN connection (See page  
163.)  
LAN cascade connection  
(See page 164.)  
ISDN connection (See page  
LAN&ISDN cascade  
165.)  
connection (See page 168.)  
LAN & ISDN connection (See  
page 167)  
Connecting points (max.)  
6
10  
Automatic 1-3 terminals Four-split window  
connected  
4-5 terminals Six-split window  
connected  
Six-screen mosaic  
Six-screen mosaic  
Split  
(Fixed)  
1-3 terminals  
connected  
4-5 terminals Six-split window  
connected  
Voice Activate  
Broadcast  
Full screen  
Full screen  
Full screen  
Using the Display Control 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switching the Broadcast Mode  
At the beginning of the conference, the mode set for “Broadcast Mode” on  
page 4 of the Communication Setup menu is applied. You can change the  
mode during communication.  
1 Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.  
The Display Control menu appears.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select  
“Broadcast Mode”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Display Control  
Display  
Control  
Broadcast Mode  
Near  
Camera  
Far  
Split  
Split: Selects the Split mode.  
Split (A Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected first to fix  
in the Split (Fixed) mode.  
Split (B Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected second to  
fix in the Split (Fixed) mode.  
Split (C Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected third to fix  
in the Split (Fixed) mode.  
Split (D Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected fourth to  
fix in the Split (Fixed) mode.  
Split (E Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected fifth to fix  
in the Split (Fixed) mode.  
Split (Near End Fixed): Fixes the local picture in the Split (Fixed) mode.  
Voice Activate: Selects the Voice Activate mode.  
Self Broadcast: Broadcasts the near end (local) party in the Broadcast  
mode.  
A Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected first in the  
Broadcast mode.  
B Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected second in  
the Broadcast mode.  
C Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected third in the  
Broadcast mode.  
D Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected fourth in  
the Broadcast mode.  
E Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected fifth in the  
Broadcast mode.  
Stop Broadcast: Stops broadcasting in the Broadcast Mode.  
184 Using the Display Control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To display the local picture in the Voice Activate mode  
You can display the local picture only on your monitor screen while the  
broadcast mode remains in Voice Activate mode.  
1 Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.  
The Display Control menu appears.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Near” under “Display”, then press  
the PUSH ENTER button.  
The local picture appears on your monitor screen.  
To restore the Voice Activate mode  
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander again, and select  
“Far” under “Display”.  
Receiving the Broadcast Requested From Any Other Terminal  
When you receive “Self Broadcast” command from one of the terminals  
connected, the picture of that terminal is broadcast in full screen.  
When you receive “Stop Broadcat” command from one of the terminals  
connected, the system returns to the previous mode.  
Notes  
• If you have received “Self Broadcast” command from another terminal, the operation  
above will not be carried out.  
• When you use a cascade connection, the Video Communication System supports the  
Voice Activate mode only.  
Using the Display Control 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ending the Multipoint Videoconference  
1 Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
/
) button on the Remote  
Commander.  
The following submenu appears.  
Disconnect  
Phone Book  
Detail Dial  
History  
Cancel  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Disconnect”, then press the PUSH  
ENTER button.  
The screen changes to the split window screen and the following menu appears.  
The location of the pictures in the split windows A to E (or A to C) is restored  
to that when the terminals were connected.  
You can display the terminal names in this window if you set “Display  
Terminal Name” to “On” in the Multipoint Setup menu.  
Picture A  
Picture B  
Picture C  
Disconnect  
Disconnect  
Disconnect  
A
D
E
Disconnect  
B
Disconnect  
C
Picture D  
Picture E  
Disconnect All  
Cancel  
Local picture  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button to select the terminal to be disconnected, then  
press the PUSH ENTER button.  
Disconnect A: Disconnects the terminal connected first.  
Disconnect B: Disconnects the terminal connected second.  
Disconnect C: Disconnects the terminal connected third.  
Disconnect D: Disconnects the terminal connected fourth.  
Disconnect E: Disconnects the terminal connected fifth.  
Disconnect All: Disconnects all the terminals.  
The selected terminal is disconnected.  
You can disconnect all the terminals by pressing the CONNECT/  
DISCONNECT (  
/
) button again.  
To cancel the disconnection  
Select “Cancel” in step 3, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
186 Ending the Multipoint Videoconference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When a terminal whose video mode is  
QCIF standard only  
The system does not send video to the QCIF  
terminal.  
Notes on Secondary  
Terminals  
If there is a terminal that is not adequate for  
the settings set by this system, that terminal  
is called the secondary terminal.  
Communication capabilities between the  
secondary terminal and this system are  
shown below.  
• Sending/receiving audio  
• Receiving video from the secondary  
terminal  
• Disables transmission of video to the  
secondary terminal  
For details on the secondary terminal, see  
the glossary on page 224.  
When a normal phone is connected  
The audio mode of the other terminals is not  
affected if a normal phone is connected or  
disconnected any time.  
When terminals with “Far End  
Camera Control” set to “On” and  
“Off” are mixed  
As the bit rate of video signals differs  
depending on the setting of “Far End  
Camera Control”, the picture is not  
displayed on some terminals.  
When a 56K network is mixed among  
the terminals if the conference is held  
via 64K network  
The conference automatically changes to  
that via 56 K network. Terminals that cannot  
change to that network are regarded as  
secondary terminals, and the transmission of  
video is not available.  
When a terminal with different audio  
mode is connected and its video bit  
rate is different  
The conference is conducted in the video  
mode according to the terminal with the  
lowest video bit rate. A terminal that cannot  
fit this rate is regarded as a secondary  
terminal, and the transmission of video is not  
available.  
Notes on Secondary Terminals 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the External MCU  
Connecting the external MCU (Multipoint Control Unit) enables conduct of a  
multipoint videoconference unless the MCU software is installed into the  
Communication Terminal.  
POWER  
LAN or ISDN  
POWER  
POWER  
POWER  
POWER  
MCU  
PCS-PG70/  
G70P  
Activating the Chair Control  
If the MCU for the ISDN connection is equipped with the chair control  
function, the chair control can be activated for up to 99 terminals connected.  
The chair control mode allows you to specify any terminal to display on the  
monitor screen, to broadcast the specified picture to all the terminals, or to  
broadcast the local picture to all the terminals.  
1 Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.  
The Display Control menu opens.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Chair Request” under “Broadcast  
Mode”.  
Display Control  
Display  
Control  
Broadcast Mode Terminal  
Near  
Camera  
Chair  
Request  
Far  
1
188 Connecting the External MCU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.  
The chair control is activated and you can control up to 99 terminals. The chair  
control feature is canceled if you set “Broadcast Mode” to “Chair Release”.  
Note  
When you operate incorrectly, the message “MCU operation rejected.” will appear  
on the monitor screen.  
Displaying the picture of the selected terminal  
1 Open the Display Control menu.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Receive” under “Broadcast Mode”.  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button to select the number of the terminal you want  
to view in the box under “Terminal”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The picture of the selected terminal is displayed on the local screen.  
Notes  
• When no terminal is selected, the picture of the smallest terminal number will be  
displayed.  
• The terminal number is assigned to a terminal based on the information on each  
terminal obtained from the MCU.  
To broadcast the selected picture to all terminals  
1 Open the Display Control menu.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Broadcast” under “Broadcast Mode”.  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button to select the number of the terminal you want  
to broadcast in the box under “Terminal”, then press the PUSH ENTER  
button.  
The picture of the selected terminal is displayed on the local screen and is  
broadcast to all terminals.  
To broadcast a local picture to all terminals  
1 Open the Display Control menu.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Broadcast” under “Broadcast Mode”.  
3 Use the V, v, B or b button to display “0” in the box under “Terminal”,  
then press the PUSH ENTER button.  
The local picture is broadcast to all terminals. The  
the monitor screen.  
indicator is shown on  
Connecting the External MCU 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exiting the chair control  
1 Open the Display Control menu.  
2 Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Chair Release” under “Broadcast  
Mode”.  
The chair control is not available for the local party.  
190 Connecting the External MCU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multipoint Attributes  
Number Attribute  
Value (H.320 MCU)  
Value (H.323 MCU)  
1
Maximum number of terminals 5 (6 when including the 5 (6 when including the  
that can be connected to a single local terminal)  
MCU  
local terminal)  
1
2
Maximum number of  
1
concurrent (independent)  
conferences that can be  
supported in a single MCU  
3
Maximum number of ports that  
can be connected to other  
MCUs  
0
1
4.1  
4.2  
5
Network interfaces at each port BRI, PRI (T1/E1)  
Restricted network capability Restrict_Required  
Transmission rates available at 1B, 2B, 4B, 6B (BRI)  
LAN  
Total rate of all points  
each port  
1B, 2B, 4B, 6B, 8B, 12B Max. 4 Mbps  
(PRI (T1/E1))  
6
Audio Processor  
Equipped  
Equipped  
6.1  
mixed/switched  
noise/echo suppression on  
“silent” ports  
Mixed  
No  
Mixed  
No  
6.2  
7
audio algorithm at each port  
G.711, G.728, G.722  
Equipped  
G.711, G.728, G.722  
Equipped  
Video Processor (motion  
pictures)  
7.1  
switched/mixed  
Voice activated/four-  
Voice activated/four-  
split/six-split/user control split/six-split/user control  
7.2  
8
video algorithm at each port  
Data Processor  
H.261, H.263, H.264  
Equipped  
H.261, H.263, H.264  
Equipped  
8.1  
data broadcast facility, LSD  
data broadcast facility, HSD  
Equipped  
No  
8.2  
9
MLP Processor  
Encryption  
Equipped  
No support  
Support  
Multipoint Attributes 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Number Attribute  
Value (H.320 MCU)  
Value (H.323 MCU)  
10  
Method of choosing Selected  
Custom:  
Custom:  
Communication Mode - SCM  
Number of lines (1B/  
2B/4B/6B)  
Audio algorithm  
(G.711, G.728, G.722,  
MPEG4 ACC)  
Auto:  
LAN bandwidth (Total  
rate of all points, max.  
1920 Kbps)  
Audio algorithm  
(G.711, G.728, G.722,  
MPEG4 ACC)  
Video frame rate (7.5/ Auto:  
10/15/30fps)  
Video encoding mode  
(CIF/QCIF)  
Fixed or switched  
automatically:  
Video algorithm  
(H.261 fixed, H.261,  
H.263 or H.264  
switched  
Video frame rate (7.5/  
10/15/30fps)  
Video encoding mode  
(CIF/QCIF)  
Fixed or switched  
automatically:  
Video algorithm  
(H.261 fixed, H.261,  
H.263 or H.264  
switched  
automatically)  
Restrict (56K fixed/  
Auto)  
automatically)  
11  
12  
Capability of secondary  
terminals  
Capable of audio  
Capable of audio  
sending/receiving and  
video receiving only.  
Capable of audio  
sending/receiving only  
via a normal phone.  
sending/receiving and  
video receiving only.  
Capable of audio  
sending/receiving only  
via a normal phone.  
Call setup provision(s)  
No call/receive  
reservation  
No call/receive  
reservation  
13  
Control capabilities  
13.1  
Numbering of terminals  
Simple chair control using BAS No  
No  
Equipped  
No  
13.2  
MLP facilities  
No  
No  
[refer to ITU-T T series]  
13.3  
14  
H.224 (simplex data)  
Cascading  
Equipped  
No  
Equipped  
Equipped  
No  
14.1  
14.2  
15  
Fixed rates (“simple”)  
Master/Slave  
No  
No  
Equipped  
Equipped  
Terminal identification  
No  
16  
MBE capability Register  
necessary information such as  
the telephone number and index  
number.  
No  
192 Multipoint Attributes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e Power switch  
Turns on/off the Communication  
Terminal. The power is on when the  
switch is set to the @ side and off when  
the switch is set to the a side.  
Appendix  
Rear  
Location and  
Function of Parts  
and Controls  
MCU VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
(MIXED)  
AUDIO IN  
AUX LINE  
MAIN  
CAMERA  
SUB  
CAMERA  
AUX IN  
AUX IN  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
WHITE  
100BASE-TX/  
10BASE-T  
DC 19.5V  
1
2
IR OUT  
BOARD  
EC-MIC  
RGB OUT  
DSB  
AUX CONTROL  
1
2
CTRL-S  
1
2
ISDN UNIT  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
Communication Terminal  
A
NITOR  
VIDEO OUT  
Front/Right side  
a MCU VIDEO OUT (1 - 5)  
connectors (mini DIN 4-pin)  
1 2  
3
During a multipoint conference, the  
video signal from each point is output to  
the corresponding connector.  
b
AUDIO OUT (MIXED) jack (phono jack)  
Used when recording the sound to  
minute a conference. The mixed sounds  
of a local and remote parties are output  
from this jack.  
4
5
a ON LINE indicator  
c AUDIO OUT jack (phono jack)  
Blinks during dialing or answering and  
lights in blue when connection is  
completed. It turns off when the system  
is disconnected.  
Connect to the audio input of the TV  
monitor.  
d AUDIO IN AUX jack (phono jack)  
Connect to the audio output of the  
optional VCR or audio equipment.  
b POWER/STANDBY indicator  
Lights in green when the power switch is  
set to on (@). Lights in orange when the  
Communication Terminal is set to  
standby mode.  
e AUDIO IN LINE jack (phono jack)  
Used when connecting to the optional  
CTE-600CommunicationTransduceror  
an external microphone mixer.  
c LAN ALERT indicator  
Lights in yellow when packet error (loss) or  
link error occurs during communication.  
f MIC1/MIC2 (PLUG IN POWER)  
jacks (minijack)  
Connect to the optional PCS-A1 or PCS-  
A300 microphone. Power is supplied to  
the microphone from the  
d Memory Stick slot  
Insert a “Memory Stick” (not supplied)  
into this slot.  
Communication Terminal.  
Location and Function of Parts and Controls 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
g MAIN CAMERA connector  
q VIDEO OUT MONITOR 1  
connector (mini DIN 4-pin)  
Connect to the S-video input on the TV  
monitor or VCR.  
Connect to the TERMINAL connector  
on the rear of the Camera.  
h MAIN AUX IN connector (mini  
DIN 4-pin)  
r VIDEO OUT MONITOR 2  
connector (mini DIN 4-pin)  
Connect to the video output of external  
video equipment.  
Connect to the S-video input on the  
second TV monitor when the system  
uses the dual monitor mode.  
i SUB CAMERA connector  
Connect to the TERMINAL connector  
on the rear of the secondary camera.  
s EC-MIC jacks (1, 2)  
For future expansion. Not used.  
j SUB AUX IN jack (mini DIN 7-pin)  
t RGB OUT connector (D-sub 15-  
Connect to the video output of external  
video equipment.  
pin)  
Connect to the RGB input of the  
optional projector or display unit.  
k DC 19.5V jack  
Connect the supplied PCS-AC19V6 AC  
power adaptor.  
u WHITE BOARD connector  
Connect to the optional mimio Xi.  
l IR OUT 1/2 jacks  
v 100BASE-TX/10BASE-Tconnector  
Connect the supplied IR repeater.  
Connect the IR repeater for the monitor  
connected to the VIDEO OUT  
MONITOR MAIN connector to the IR  
OUT 1 jack, and the IR repeater for the  
monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT  
MONITOR SUB connector to the IR  
OUT 2 jack.  
(8-pin modular)  
Used to conduct a conference via a  
LAN. Connect to a hub using the  
category 5 cable.  
w DSB connector (D-sub 15-pin)  
Connect to the TERMINAL connector  
on the optional PCSA-DSB1S Data  
Solution Box.  
m AUX CONTROL connector (D-sub  
9-pin)  
Used for maintenance service.  
x ISDN UNIT connector  
Connect to the TERMINAL connector  
on the optional ISDN Unit such as  
PCSA-B384S, PCSA-B768S and  
PCSA-PRI.  
n CTRL-S jack (minijack)  
Connect to the optional Remote  
Commander Signal Receptor.  
The remote sensor of the Camera Unit  
does not operate when this connector is  
in use.  
o U (ground) terminal  
Connect a ground wire.  
p VIDEO OUT AUX jack (phono  
jack)  
Connect to the video input of the TV  
monitor or VCR.  
194 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d Infrared sensor  
PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera  
Unit (Optional)  
Receives the infrared wireless signal  
from the optional PCS-DS150  
Document Stand. The received signal is  
used as object input.  
Front  
e TERMINAL connector  
Connect to the CAMERA UNIT  
connector on the Communication  
Terminal.  
f VISCA OUT connector  
g Tripod hole  
Use to attach the camera on a tripod.  
Rear  
TERMINAL  
VISCA OUT  
Bottom  
a Lens  
b Remote sensor  
Point the Remote Commander to the  
sensor when operating this system.  
c POWER indicator (green)  
Lights when the power switch on the  
Communication Terminal is set to on  
and goes out when it is set to off or the  
terminal is set to standby mode.  
Location and Function of Parts and Controls 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
b VOLUME +/– buttons  
PCS-RG70 Remote  
Commander  
Adjusts the volume of the sound  
received from a remote party.  
+: to increase the volume  
–: to decrease the volume  
c PinP (BACK SPACE) button  
Displays a window picture when pressed  
during communication.  
Each time you press this button, the  
location of the window picture changes.  
Pressing the button displays the picture  
in full screen while the Camera menu  
opens.  
When used for character input, deletes  
the character you entered last.  
d VIDEO INPUT SELECT  
(SYMBOL) button  
MENU  
Selects the video input signal. Each time  
you press the button, the input signal  
switches.  
Used to enter a symbol for character  
input.  
e Arrow buttons (V/v/B/b)  
Used to select the menu or make various  
settings in the menu. Also used for  
camera angle adjustment.  
16  
f PUSH ENTER button  
Executes the selection or setting in the  
menu and goes to the next layer.  
-RG70  
Used to return to the previous layer in  
the menu.  
You can set for a beep not to sound by  
pressing the button on the Remote  
Commander with the Audio Setup menu.  
h Number (0-9,  
,
) buttons  
For the setting, see “Audio Setup Menu” on  
page 50.  
Used to enter the letters or numbers of a  
telephone number, etc.  
Used for focus, brightness and backlight  
compensation adjustments.  
a MIC ON/OFF button  
Turns off the local sound to be sent to a  
remote party. To restore the sound, press  
the button again.  
i Battery compartment (rear)  
Insert two size AAA (R03) batteries.  
196 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
j @/1 (power on/off) button  
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit  
(Optional)  
Sets the Communication Terminal to  
standby mode when it is turned on.  
Turns on the Communication Terminal  
when it is in standby.  
Front/Upper panel  
k DISPLAY (CLEAR) button  
Switches the picture displayed on the  
monitor screen.  
Deletes a line when used for character  
input.  
l ZOOM (T/W) buttons  
Zooms in or out.  
T: to enlarge the picture  
W: to reduce the picture  
m FAR/NEAR (ALPHA/NUM) button  
Switches the picture on a local or remote  
site.  
Rear  
Switches the input mode between  
alphabets and numbers for character  
input.  
n MENU button  
Used to display a menu.  
a POWER indicator  
o CONNECT/DISCONNECT (  
/
Lights in orange when power is supplied  
to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is  
complete, blinks in green.  
) button  
Used to connect or disconnect a remote  
party for a conference.  
b STATUS 1-3 indicators  
p HELP button  
Lights in orange when link  
Used to show the help guide.  
synchronizationof each ISDN connector  
is established. Lights in yellow when  
each ISDN line is connected.  
c ISDN 1-3 terminals (8-pin modular  
jack)  
Connect to the ISDN lines using the  
ISDN modular cable.  
d TERMINAL connector  
Connect to the ISDN UNIT connector  
on the Communication Terminal with  
the interface cable supplied with the  
ISDN Unit.  
Location and Function of Parts and Controls 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit  
(Optional)  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit  
(Optional)  
Front/Upper panel  
Front/Upper panel  
PRI  
PRI  
Rear  
Rear  
a POWER indicator  
a POWER indicators  
Lights in orange when power is supplied  
to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is  
complete, blinks in green.  
Lights in orange when power is supplied  
to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is  
complete, blinks in green.  
b STATUS 1-6 indicators  
b STATUS PRI indicator  
Lights in orange when link  
Lights in orange when link  
synchronization ofeach ISDN connector  
is established. Lights in yellow when  
each ISDN line is connected.  
synchronization of the ISDN connector  
is established. Lights in yellow when  
each ISDN line is connected.  
c ISDN 1-6 terminals (8-pin modular  
c ISDN PRI terminal (8-pin modular  
jack)  
jack)  
Connect to the ISDN lines using the  
ISDN modular cable.  
Connect to the ISDN line using the  
ISDN modular cable.  
d TERMINAL connector  
Connect to the ISDN UNIT connector  
on the Communication Terminal with  
the interface cable supplied with the  
ISDN Unit  
d TERMINAL connector  
Connect to the ISDN UNIT connector  
on the Communication Terminal with  
the interface cable supplied with the  
ISDN Unit.  
.
198 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
f LINE OUT jack (stereo minijack)  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution  
Box (Optional)  
Connect to the audio input jack on the  
active speaker, etc.  
Outputs monaural sound.  
Front/Upper panel  
g AUX IN/OUT jacks (phono jack)  
Connects to the optional CTE-600  
Communication Transducer.  
h MIC 1–MIC 5 jacks (minijack)  
Connect to the optional PCS-A1 or PCS-  
A300 microphone.  
i TOPROCESSORconnector(D-sub  
15-pin)  
Connect to the DSB connector on the  
Communication Terminal using the  
interface cable supplied with the Data  
Solution Box.  
Rear  
j RGB OUT connector (D-sub 15-  
pin)  
Outputs the video signal to a projector,  
TV monitor, etc.  
a RGB A input select button and  
indicator  
Selects the video input from the video  
equipment connected to the RGB IN A  
connector.  
b SEND button and indicator  
Sends the selected input picture to the  
Communication Terminal.  
c RGB B input select button and  
indicator  
Selects the video input from the video  
equipment connected to the RGB IN B  
connector.  
d RGB IN A connector (D-sub 15-pin)  
Connects to the RGB output connector  
on a computer, etc.  
e RGB IN B connector (D-sub 15-pin)  
Connect to the RGB output connector on  
a computer, etc.  
Location and Function of Parts and Controls 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
On-screen Messages  
Check the following if a message appears on the TV monitor when operating  
the Communication Terminal.  
Message  
Meaning  
Incorrect dialing setup.  
Make sure the selected entry is correctly registered.  
CANNOT COMPLETE CONNECTION  
(The following code and message appear.)  
0
1
Unknown network error:  
Number does not exist:  
Try again later.  
Check the number and try again.  
Try again later.  
2,3,6 Network congestion:  
16  
17  
Normal disconnection:  
Line is busy:  
(The line has been disconnected normally.)  
Try again later.  
18,19 System not responding:  
Check if the remote system is connected.  
Confirm the site number.  
20  
21  
22  
26  
27  
28  
No such subscriber  
Call rejected:  
Check if the remote system is connected.  
Check the number and try again.  
Try again later.  
Called party number changed:  
Connection restoration request:  
Remote system out of order:  
Invalid number entered:  
Check if the remote system is operational.  
Check the number and try again.  
Try again later.  
31, 34, 41 – 44, 47  
Network not available:  
50  
Not a Subscriber:  
Check the remote party’s facility contract.  
Check if “Restrict” is set correctly.  
57,58 Bearer capability not authorized:  
70  
88  
Restricted capability:  
Set “Restrict” to “56K” and try again.  
Check the connection of the remote system.  
Turn off and restart the system and try again.  
Terminal attribute error:  
91, 95 – 102, 111  
Protocol error:  
128  
132  
134  
H.221 negotiation timeout:  
Invalid SPID:  
Turn off and restart the system and try again.  
Reregister the SPID.  
Physical link synchronization  
error:  
Check the connection of the ISDN cable.  
144, 145  
Bonding negotiation timeout:  
Turn off and restart the system and try again.  
177  
178  
179  
LAN connection timeout:  
LAN connection rejected:  
DNS error:  
Try again later.  
Try again later.  
Please check DNS.  
200 On-screen Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Message  
Meaning  
180  
Dialing your own number is  
invalid.  
Please check the IP address of the remote party.  
181  
GateKeeper error.  
Please check the IP address of the remote party.  
Busy line - Connection not possible.  
The telephone line of the remote party is busy and  
cannot be connected.  
Far end inactive  
The remote party operates the menu, and the still  
picture cannot be sent.  
System not responding.  
Close this menu to connect line  
Cannot establish all connections  
Connection time out.  
Check if the remote system is connected.  
Close the menu when starting a conference.  
Check the telephone number of the remote party.  
Wait for a while and then try dialing again.  
Wait for a while and then try dialing again.  
Wait for a while and then try dialing again.  
Communication error  
Configuration error  
MCU operation rejected.  
The function is not available when external MCU is  
connected.  
Corrupted data stream-Terminating  
connection.  
A signal error occurred. The line connections are  
compelled to be disconnected.  
Memory full  
The memory capacity of the “Memory Stick” is  
full.  
Input title  
Input an index title.  
Operation disabled  
Wrong password  
The password is not correct.  
Enter the correct password.  
01H LAN configuration error  
(IP address)  
The IP address is not proper.  
02H LAN configuration error  
(Netmask)  
The netmask is not proper.  
03H LAN configuration error  
(MAC address)  
The MAC address is not proper.  
The IP address and netmask cannot be obtained.  
04H LAN configuration error  
(DHCP error)  
05H Gatekeeper registration error  
06H SNMP error  
The setting of the Gatekeeper is not proper.  
SNMP is not set properly.  
LAN configuration error  
(Gatekeeper)  
The setting of the Gatekeeper is not proper.  
LAN configuration error  
(SNMP error)  
The setting of the SNMP is not proper.  
LAN configuration error  
Memory Stick error.  
General error.  
The settings in the LAN Setup menu are not proper.  
The format of the “Memory Stick” is wrong.  
On-screen Messages 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Meaning  
No Memory Stick.  
Memory Stick write-protected.  
Insert a “Memory Stick”.  
Release the lock of the erasure prevention switch  
on the “Memory Stick”.  
Memory full.  
The data has been saved in the “Memory Stick” to  
its full capacity.  
Memory Stick file error.  
The file format of the “Memory Stick” is incorrect  
or abnormal.  
Memory Stick file decode error.  
Memory Stick size error.  
Decoding the JPEG file has failed.  
The file size of the “Memory Stick” is not  
acceptable.  
There are no images recorded in the  
Memory Stick.  
No images are recorded in the “Memory Stick”.  
File error.  
There is an abnormality in the file.  
File size error.  
File decode error.  
Format error.  
The file size is not acceptable.  
Decoding the JPEG file has failed.  
The “Memory Stick” cannot be formatted.  
Change the setting after disconnecting the system.  
Settings cannot be changed during  
communication.  
The still images were not sent.  
Transmission of the still images has failed.  
The presentation screen can not be sent.  
Transmission of the RGB data from the Data  
Solution Box has failed.  
Multipoint connection to this participant was Multipoint connection with this party is not  
not made.  
available.  
The LAN cannot be used.  
You cannot use the LAN connection.  
You cannot use the Data Solution Box connected.  
The DATA SOLUTION BOX cannot be  
used.  
Unknown device is connected.  
An unacceptable device is connected to the WHITE  
BOARD connector.  
ISDN UNIT is not available.  
Communication with the ISDN unit cannot be  
made.  
No more cascade connections are enabled.  
Installing the MCU software into three or more  
Communication Terminals does not allow cascade  
connection.  
Cascade connection via ISDN is not  
available.  
You cannot use cascade connection when your  
system is connected via ISDN.  
Cannot send RGB data while receiving.  
While you are receiving an RGB picture from  
another terminal, you cannot send an RGB picture  
from equipment connected to the Data Solution  
Box.  
A still image is being sent or received. The While you are sending or receiving a still image,  
Data Solution Box is not usable.  
you cannot send or receive the RGB picture via the  
Data Solution Box.  
202 On-screen Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Meaning  
Connection with the Data Solution Box is  
not correct. Please reset the system.  
Connection between the Communication Terminal  
and the Data Solution Box is not correct. Turn off  
the Communication Terminal, then turn it on again.  
Fan in the Data Solution Box does not work The fan equipped with the Data Solution Box is not  
properly. The Data Solution Box is not  
usable.  
working properly. You cannot use the Data Solution  
Box.  
The Whiteboard cannot be used.  
The whiteboard can be used for a videoconference  
only between PCS-G70/G70P systems.  
Battery in the stylus could be weak. Replace The battery in the stylus for the whiteboard is low.  
the battery.  
Replace the battery in the stylus with a new one.  
The far-end system is not compatible with  
the encryption feature.  
When conducting an encrypted videoconference  
via LAN, you cannot connect to the system that is  
not compatible with the encryption via LAN  
feature.  
The encryption feature on a far-end system When conducting an encrypted videoconference  
is disabled.  
via LAN, you cannot connect to the system if the  
encryption via LAN feature is deactivated.  
The encryption feature on a far-end system When conducting a daily conference, you cannot  
is enabled.  
connect to the system if the encryption via LAN  
feature is activated.  
The entered password for the encryption  
feature is not correct.  
Enter the correct password.  
The encrypted videoconference is not  
available if any terminal is connected via  
ISDN.  
While the videoconference is held via the ISDN  
connection, you cannot connect any terminal via  
the LAN connection if your encryption via LAN  
feature is activated.  
At least thirteen characters are required as a You have to enter 13 to 20 characters, numbers or  
password for the encryption feature.  
symbols as the password required for conduct of an  
encrypted videoconference via LAN.  
PPPoE connection has failed.  
LAN connection has failed. Check the PPPoE  
setting.  
PPPoE server admission has failed.  
Connection to the PPPoE server fails.  
Access to a network is not admitted by the PPPoE  
server.  
Check the DNS server setting.  
Communication via LAN is not available.  
Check the LAN cable.  
The connection to a LAN cannot be made. Check  
the LAN cable.  
An IP address is not obtained via DHCP.  
Please dial by entering the IP address.  
Check the DHCP setting.  
Be sure to enter the IP address of the remote party  
when dialing.  
Reference to DNS has failed.  
The LAN connection has failed as you entered the  
user name when using the domain name server.  
Enter the IP address.  
Your system attempts to connect to other  
Connect your system to the videoconferencing  
equipment than a videoconferencing system. system.  
On-screen Messages 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Meaning  
Some trouble occurs during connection.  
Connection has failed.  
Try to connect again.  
Check the information registered to the  
gatekeeper.  
When you use the gatekeeper mode, the registered  
information on gatekeeper appears in page 2/2 of  
the LAN Setup menu.  
Connection has been rejected as the data  
exceeds the bandwidth of a gatekeeper.  
Connection has failed as the data exceeds the  
bandwidth of a gatekeeper.  
Gatekeeper does not respond.  
Check the gatekeeper setting.  
The ISDN Unit is not connected.  
Check the ISDN connection.  
The ISDN Unit is not connected.  
The ISDN line is invalid. Check the ISDN  
connection.  
ISDN lines are not connected correctly.  
Check the ISDN configuration.  
Check the ISDN connection.  
Check the settings in the ISDN Setup menu.  
Enter the telephone number of the remote party.  
A telephone number of a remote party has  
not been entered.  
The entered telephone number of a remote  
party is not correct.  
Enter the correct telephone number of the remote  
party.  
Problems connecting to a router or an ISDN The ISDN connection has not been made. There  
connection.  
may be some problem in a router or in the ISDN  
connection on the remote party.  
Line is busy. Try to dial again later.  
Line is busy. Wait for a while and try dialing again.  
A line has not been completely connected.  
The far-end videoconferencing system did  
not respond to our calling.  
The videoconferencing system does not respond to  
the calling, and the connection has failed.  
The terminal with the specified IP address  
does not exist, or the system is turned off.  
The connection to the remote party cannot be  
made. You may specify a different IP address from  
that of the terminal or the system of the remote  
party is turned off.  
Connection rejected.  
Call not responded.  
H.245 Error.  
The connection to the remote party has failed.  
The remote party does not respond to your calling.  
Error occurs while connecting to the multiple  
points via LAN.  
The remote terminal may not be compatible The bonding function may not be used. The remote  
with the bonding function.  
terminal may not be equipped with this function.  
The ISDN telephone number of the local  
party is not correctly set. Set it correctly.  
Set your ISDN telephone number correctly.  
The ISDN telephone number of the far-end The ISDN telephone number of the remote party  
party may be configured incorrectly.  
may not be set correctly.  
6B connection is available.  
Connection has been made via 6B. More channel  
connection than 6B is not available.  
204 On-screen Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following messages indicate the state of the system. No action is required.  
Message  
Meaning  
Meeting starts!  
Connection with the remote party has been completed, and  
you can now start a conference.  
Starting connection.  
After receiving a call from the remote party the system starts  
connecting.  
Meeting ends.  
Operations for ending the conference have been completed.  
The data is being saved.  
Please wait.  
Installation completed.  
The still image has been sent.  
Installing the software is completed.  
A still picture has been transmitted to the remote party.  
Transmission of a still image has been cancelled.  
Still image transmission  
cancelled.  
Preset 1 (–6) selected.  
The camera angle and zoom setting has been changed to that  
registered in Preset number 1 (–6).  
Still image saved to Memory  
Stick.  
The still image has been saved to the “Memory Stick”.  
Registered to Preset number 1 (– The camera angle and zoom setting has been registered in  
6).  
Preset number 1 (–6).  
Terminal A (or B, C, D, E) has  
disconnected.  
During a multipoint videoconference the remote party A (or  
B, C, D, E) has been disconnected.  
Site A (or B, C, D, E) has  
disconnected.  
During a multipoint videoconference the remote party A (or  
B, C, D, E) has ended the conference.  
The still image from the object  
input has been transmitted.  
The still image input from the Document Stand has been  
transmitted.  
The slide show is over.  
The slide show has been ended.  
The 1st (–5th) position has been  
selected.  
The terminal on the 1st (–5th) site for a multipoint  
videoconference has been selected from the Phone Book.  
The terminal participated in the  
conference.  
The remote party of the displayed terminal participates in the  
multipoint videoconference.  
The terminal has dropped out of  
the conference.  
The displayed terminal ends the multipoint videoconference.  
Viewing the terminal. [Terminal  
name]  
The picture of the displayed terminal can be seen on the  
screen.  
Now upgrading. Wait for a while. The software is now upgrading. Be sure not to turn off the  
Be sure not to turn off your system Communication Terminal until the upgrading is complete.  
while upgrading.  
Cascade connection is complete. Cascade connection with the terminals has been completed.  
Cascade connection has been Cascade connection with the terminals has been made. You  
Doing so may cause malfunction of the system.  
made. Split mode is not available. cannot display split windows.  
Use of the Private Phone Book is The “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone Book is  
available.  
registered has been inserted into the Communication  
Terminal. You can use the Private Phone Book.  
On-screen Messages 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Meaning  
Use of the Private Phone Book is The “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone Book is  
not available.  
registered has been removed from the Communication  
Terminal. You cannot use the Private Phone Book.  
The system is connecting to a  
LAN via PPPoE.  
The Video Communication System is connecting to a LAN  
using PPPoE.  
206 On-screen Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If the Communication Terminal does not function correctly, check the following.  
Symptom  
Cause  
Solution  
The power is not  
turned on.  
The power switch is not set to on.  
Set the power switch to on (@) (page  
27).  
The batteries in the Remote  
Commander are low or dead.  
Replace the batteries with new ones  
(page 25).  
Three indicators on The fan inside the terminal stops.  
Turn off the system immediately and  
consult with Sony dealer.  
the front of the  
Communication  
Terminal blink.  
No sound or the  
volume is very low. low.  
The volume of the system is too  
Adjust the sound volume by pressing  
the VOLUME +/– buttons on the  
Remote Commander (page 31).  
The volume of the TV monitor is  
Adjust the volume of the TV monitor.  
too low.  
The microphone on the remote  
party is turned off.  
Ask the remote party to turn on the  
microphone.  
“Mic Select” is not set properly.  
Set up “Mic Select” properly  
according to the microphone to be  
used (page 50).  
Audio input is not selected  
properly.  
Set up “Input Select” properly (page  
50).  
The microphone or external  
equipment is not connected  
correctly.  
Check the connection (pages 129, 134  
and 143).  
Picture is blurred.  
Manual focus is selected but picture Adjust the focus (page 95).  
remains blurred.  
When auto focus is selected, the  
Select manual focus and adjust  
background is too bright, contrast is manually (page 96).  
too high, or the background or the  
participants’ clothes contain fine  
line patterns.  
Troubleshooting 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symptom  
Cause  
Solution  
No picture.  
The selected picture source is not  
tuned on.  
Turn on the selected video equipment.  
Video input is not selected properly. Select the video input with the  
VIDEO INPUT SELECT button  
(page 100).  
The selected picture source is not  
correctly connected to the system.  
Check the connections (page 134).  
A voice meeting is held.  
This is not a malfunction.  
Movement of the camera is  
prevented.  
Turn off the Communication  
Terminal, then turn it on again.  
No connection.  
Wrong number was dialed.  
Check the entered number.  
The setting of “Line I/F” is not  
correct.  
Set “Line I/F” to correct interface  
referring to “Calling a Remote Party”  
(page 78).  
The registered items in the Phone  
Book are not correct.  
Register the party correctly referring  
to “Registering a Remote Party –  
Phone Book” (page 68).  
208 Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Cause  
Solution  
No connection.  
Some of the system settings are not Set the system settings correctly  
correct.  
referring to “Registering Local  
Information” (page 43).  
The IP address and network mask Ask the system administrator to set  
are not set correctly (when using  
LAN).  
them correctly (page 59).  
The LAN or ISDN cable is  
disconnected.  
Connect correctly (pages 23, 24).  
Connect correctly (pages 23, 24).  
The LAN or ISDN cable is  
connected to the incorrect  
connector.  
The LAN or ISDN cable is down.  
Replace the cable with a new one.  
The cable exclusively designed for Use the cable for LAN connection.  
the ISDN connection is used for  
LAN connection (when using  
LAN).  
Incorrect type of cable (cross or  
straight cable) is used for the LAN  
or ISDN connection.  
Use the correct type of cable.  
Turn on the DSU.  
The DSU is turned off.  
If you disconnect the  
Turn off the power of the system and  
wait for a few minutes before turning  
it on again.  
communication with an abnormal  
procedure, e.g., unplugging an  
ISDN cable or turning off the  
system during communication, you  
may not connect to the ISDN line  
for a while (when using ISDN).  
If you repeat plugging/unplugging Turn off the power of the system and  
or turning on/off, you may not wait for a few minutes before turning  
connect to the network for a while it on again.  
(when using LAN).  
LAN connection timeout (when  
using LAN).  
Try again later.  
Packet for videoconferencing is not Consult with the system administrator  
acceptable under the current LAN so that the packet for  
environment (when using LAN).  
videoconferencing becomes  
acceptable under your LAN  
environment.  
The remote terminal is not turned  
on.  
Ask the remote party to turn on the  
terminal.  
It takes a long time for the remote Ask the remote party to cancel the  
party to be able to answer from the standby mode.  
standby mode.  
The remote party is in  
Call the remote party after they end  
communication with another party. the communication with another  
party.  
Troubleshooting 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Cause  
Solution  
No connection.  
Answering the call is not permitted Ask the remote party to permit  
by the remote terminal as it is  
operating for setups, etc.  
answering a call.  
The remote terminal is not set to  
auto answer mode.  
Ask the remote party to set the  
terminal to auto answer mode, or to  
answer a call manually.  
The ISDN telephone numbers are  
not set up in the remote terminal  
(when using bonding).  
Ask the remote party to set up “Area  
Code” and “Local Number” in the  
ISDN Setup menu correctly (page  
64).  
The eighth digit and up of the ISDN Connect without using bonding, or  
telephone numbers are not the same use the ISDN telephone numbers that  
when connecting using bonding  
(when the remote party uses the  
videoconference system of an older  
model such as the PCS-1600).  
are the same in the eighth digit and  
up.  
There is some problem with the  
remote terminal.  
Try to dial the number of another  
terminal.  
A message appears on the screen.  
See “On-screen Messages“  
(page 200).  
Still pictures or the The write-protect tab on the  
Phone Book cannot “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.  
Release the lock.  
be saved to the  
The “Memory Stick” has already  
“Memory Stick.”  
Use another “Memory Stick.”  
been recorded to full capacity.  
210 Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 kHz (G.711/G.723.1/G.728/  
G.729 compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendation)  
Specifications  
Transmission rate  
56 Kbps, 64 Kbps (G.711  
compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendation)  
48 Kbps, 56 Kbps, 64 Kbps (G.722  
compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendation)  
64 Kbps, 96 Kbps (MPEG4  
Audio) (when using LAN)  
24 Kbps, 32 Kbps (G.722.1  
compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendation) (when using  
LAN)  
16 Kbps (G.728 compliant with  
ITU-T Recommendation)  
8 Kbps (G.729 compliant with  
ITU-T Recommendation)  
(when using LAN)  
PCS-PG70/PG70P  
Communication Terminal  
This unit is compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendations H.320 and H.323.  
Motion picture  
Operating bandwidth  
64 Kbps to 4 Mbps (standard, LAN  
connection)  
56 Kbps to 768 Kbps (when  
installing the PCSA-B768S,  
ISDN connection)  
56 Kbps to 384 Kbps (when  
installing the PCSA-B384S,  
ISDN connection)  
56 Kbps to 1472 Kbps (T1)  
56 Kbps to 1920 Kbps (E1)  
(when installing the PCSA-PRI,  
ISDN connection)  
5.3 Kbps, 6.3 Kbps (G.723.1  
compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendation) (when using  
LAN)  
48 Kbps (when using ISDN)  
Network  
Multiplexing  
Coding  
H.261/H.263/H.263+/H.263++/  
H.263 4CIF/H.264/Interlaced  
SIF (ITU-T Recommendation)/  
Interlaced SIF (H.264, H.263)  
MPEG4 Simple Profile (when  
using LAN)  
Video, audio, data  
Frame format  
Interface  
H.221 (compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendation)  
Picture elements  
CIF: 352 pixels × 288 lines  
LAN (standard), 64 Kbps to 4  
Mbps  
ISDN (BRI), up to 3 lines (when  
installing the PCSA-B384S)  
up to 6 lines (when installing the  
PCSA-B768S)  
QCIF: 176 pixels × 144 lines  
Color system  
NTSC (PCS-PG70)  
PAL (PCS-PG70P)  
Capable of connection between  
both color systems  
ISDN (PRI) T1 or E1 (when  
vinstalling the PCSA-PRI)  
Data transmission rate  
LSD 1.2 Kbps, 4.8 Kbps, 6.4 Kbps  
Still Picture  
MLP 6.4 Kbps, 24 Kbps, 32 Kbps  
HMLP 62.4 Kbps, 64 Kbps, 128  
Kbps  
Pixels  
704 pixels × 480 lines (PCS-PG70)  
704 pixels × 576 lines  
(PCS-PG70P)  
LAN protocol supported  
Encoding  
H.261 (ITU-T Recommendation)  
Annex. D (4CIF)  
HTTP  
FTP  
Telnet  
RTP/RTCP  
TCP/UDP  
SNMP  
H.263 (special format of this  
system)  
Sound  
Bandwidth  
14 kHz (MPEG4 Audio)  
7 kHz (G.722/G.722.1 compliant  
with ITU-T Recommendation)  
Remote control  
Far end camera control  
Specifications 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
H.281 (compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendation)  
Approx. 470 000 pixels (Effective:  
approx. 440 000 pixels)  
Data transfer  
(PCSA-CG70P)  
T.120 (compliant with ITU-T  
Recommendation)  
Lens  
f = 3.1 to 31 mm, F 1.8 to 2.9,  
Horizontal angle 6.6° to 65°  
Focal distance  
100 (WIDE) to 600 (TELE) mm  
General  
Power requirements  
19.5 V  
Power consumption  
5 A  
Operating temperature  
Minimum illumination  
3.5 lux at F 1.8/50 IRE  
Illumination range  
3.5 lux to 100 000 lux  
Horizontal resolution  
470 TV lines (PCSA-CG70)  
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)  
Operating humidity  
20% to 80%  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Storage humidity  
20% to 80% (no condensation)  
Dimensions 420 × 70 × 256 mm (W × H × D)  
450 TV lines (PCSA-CG70P)  
Pan/tilt action  
Dimension  
Mass  
Horizontal 100°  
Vertical 25°  
130 × 141 × 130 mm (W × H × D)  
1
9
1
(5 /8 × 5 /16 × 5 /8 in.) (not  
including projections)  
Approx. 1.0 kg (2 lb. 3 oz.)  
Supplied accessory  
Camera cable (3m) (9.8 ft)  
1
3
1
(16 /2 × 2 /4 × 10 /16 in.) (not  
including projections)  
Mass  
Approx. 5.3 kg (11 lb. 11 oz.)  
Supplied accessories  
Remote Commander PCS-RG70  
PCS-RG70 Remote  
Commander  
(1)  
Size AAA (R03) batteries for  
Remote Commander (2)  
IR repeater (2)  
S-video cable (1.5 m) (4.9 ft) (1)  
Audio cable (1 m) (3.3 ft) (1)  
AC adaptor PCS-AC19V6 (1)  
Power cord (1)  
21-pin adaptor (1)  
(PCS-PG70P only)  
CD-ROM (1)  
Signal format  
Infrared SIRCS  
Control  
DC 3V using two size AAA (R03)  
batteries  
Dimensions 47 × 43 × 195 mm (W × H × D)  
7
11  
5
(1 /8 × 1 /16 × 7 /8 in.)  
(not including projections)  
Approx. 180 g (6 oz.) (including  
batteries)  
Mass  
Operation guide (1)  
Connection Sheet (1)  
Quick connection guide (1)  
Warranty booklet (1)  
PCS-AC19V6 AC Adaptor  
Power requirements  
100 to 240V AC, 50/60 Hz, 1.6 A  
to 0.7 A  
PCSA-CG70/CG70P Camera  
Unit  
Output  
Operating temperature  
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)  
Operating humidity  
20% to 80%  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Storage humidity  
20% to 80% (no condensation)  
Dimensions 160 × 80 × 38 mm (W × H × D)  
19.5 V, 6.15A  
Video signal  
NTSC color, EIA standards  
(PCSA-CG70)  
PAL color, CCIR standards  
(PCSA-CG70P)  
Image device  
1/4 type CCD (Charge Coupled  
Device)  
Approx. 410 000 pixels (Effective:  
approx. 380 000 pixels)  
(PCSA-CG70)  
5
1
1
(6 /16 × 3 /8 × 1 /2 in.)  
Approx. 570 g (20 oz.)  
Mass  
212 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
PCS-A1 Microphone  
(Optional)  
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit  
(Optional)  
Bandwidth  
Directional characteristic  
Omnidirectional  
Dimensions 74 ×16 × 93 mm (W × H × D)  
13 kHz  
Power requirements  
19.5 V  
Power consumption  
0.5 A  
21  
3
(3 × /32 × 3 /4 in.)  
Approx. 170 g (6 oz.)  
Plug in power  
Operating temperature  
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)  
Operating humidity  
Mass  
Power  
20% to 80%  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Storage humidity  
PCS-A300 Microphone  
(Optional)  
20% to 80% (no condensation)  
Dimensions 166 × 34 × 128 mm (W × H × D)  
Bandwidth  
Directional characteristic  
Unidirectional  
68 × 16 × 96 mm (W × H × D)  
13 kHz  
9
3
1
(6 /16 × 1 /8 × 5 /16 in.) (not  
including projections)  
Mass  
Approx. 400 g (14 oz.)  
Dimension  
Supplied accessories  
Interface cable (5 m) (16.4 ft) (1)  
3
21  
7
(2 /4 × /32 × 3 /8 in.)  
Approx. 200 g (7 oz.)  
Plug in power  
Mass  
Power  
Operating Instructions (1)  
Warranty booklet (1)  
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit  
(Optional)  
PCSA-PRI ISDN Unit  
(Optional)  
Power requirements  
19.5 V  
Power consumption  
Power requirements  
19.5 V  
Power consumption  
0.3 A  
0.3 A  
Operating temperature  
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)  
Operating humidity  
Operating temperature  
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)  
Operating humidity  
20% to 80%  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Storage humidity  
20% to 80% (no condensation)  
Dimensions 166 × 34 × 128 mm (W × H × D)  
20% to 80%  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Storage humidity  
20% to 80% (no condensation)  
Dimensions 166 × 34 × 128 mm (W × H × D)  
9
3
1
(6 /16 × 1 /8 × 5 /16 in.)  
(not including projections)  
Approx. 400 g (14 oz.)  
9
3
1
(6 /16 × 1 /8 × 5 /16 in.(not  
including projected parts)  
Approx. 400 g (14 oz.)  
Mass  
Mass  
Supplied accessories  
Interface cable (5 m) (16.4 ft) (1)  
Supplied accessories  
Interface cable (5 m) (16.4 ft) (1)  
Operating Instructions (1)  
Warranty booklet (1)  
Operating Instructions (1)  
Warranty booklet (1)  
Specifications 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution  
Box (Optional)  
Power requirements  
19.5 V  
Power consumption  
1.0 A  
Operating temperature  
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)  
Operating humidity  
20% to 80%  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Storage humidity  
20% to 80% (no condensation)  
Dimensions 240 × 37 × 180 mm (W × H × D)  
1
7
1
(9 /2 × 1 /16 × 7 /16 in.) (not  
including projections)  
Mass  
Approx. 1.1 kg (2 lb. 7 oz.)  
Supplied accessories  
Interface cable (8 m) (26.2 ft) (1)  
Operating Instructions (1)  
Warranty booklet (1)  
PCSA-M0G70 H.320 MCU  
Software (Optional)  
Dimensions 50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm (W × H × D)  
1
7
(2 × /8 × /8 in.)  
Mass  
Approx. 4 g (0.1 oz.)  
Supplied accessories  
Serial number seal (1)  
Operating Instructions (1)  
PCSA-M3G70 H.323 MCU  
Software (Optional)  
Dimensions 50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm (W × H × D)  
1
7
(2 × /8 × /8 in.)  
Mass  
Approx. 4 g (0.1 oz.)  
Supplied accessories  
Serial number seal (1)  
Operating Instructions (1)  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
214 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Acceptable RGB Input/Output Signals  
PCS-PG70/PG70P Communication Terminal (RGB OUT)  
Picture element Signal format  
1024 × 768 XGA VESA 60 Hz  
oh (kHz) fV (Hz)  
48.363 60.004  
Dot clock  
(MHz)  
Sync  
65 H-neg V-neg  
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box (RGB IN A/RGB IN B)  
Picture  
element  
Signal format fH (kHz)  
fV (Hz)  
Dot clock  
(MHz)  
Sync  
640 × 480  
VGA mode  
31.469  
59.94  
66.667  
72.809  
25.17 H-neg V-neg  
30.24 H-neg V-neg  
31.5 H-neg V-neg  
Macintosh 13”  
35  
VGA VESA  
72 Hz  
37.861  
VGA VESA  
75 Hz  
37.5  
43.269  
35.156  
37.879  
48.077  
46.875  
53.674  
48.363  
56.476  
60.023  
75  
85.008  
56.25  
31.5 H-neg V-neg  
36 H-neg V-neg  
36 H-pos V-pos  
40 H-pos V-pos  
50 H-pos V-pos  
49.5 H-pos V-pos  
56.25 H-pos V-pos  
65 H-neg V-neg  
75 H-neg V-neg  
78.75 H-pos V-pos  
VGA VESA  
85 Hz  
800 × 600  
SVGA VESA  
56 Hz  
SVGA VESA  
60 Hz  
60.317  
72.188  
75  
SVGA VESA  
72 Hz  
SVGA VESA  
75 Hz  
SVGA VESA  
85 Hz  
85.061  
60.004  
70.069  
75.029  
1024 × 768 XGA VESA  
60 Hz  
XGA VESA  
70 Hz  
XGA VESA  
75 Hz  
Specifications 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PCSA-DSB1S Data Solution Box (RGB OUT)  
Picture element Signal format  
1024 × 768 XGA VESA 60 Hz  
fH (kHz)  
48.363  
fV (Hz)  
60.004  
Dot clock  
(MHz)  
Sync  
65 H-neg V-neg  
• While the picture input from the RGB IN A or RGB IN B connector is transmitted,  
the picture of the input signal format (VGA, SVGA or XGA) is output from this  
connector.  
216 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Signal  
Description  
Pin Assignments  
14 GND  
Ground  
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T jack  
VIDEO OUT MONITOR MAIN/SUB,  
VIDEO IN AUX 1/AUX 2 connectors  
1
8
4
2
3
1
Modular jack  
Pin Signal  
Description  
Transmit+  
Transmit–  
Receive+  
Mini-DIN 4-pin connector  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TPOP  
TPON  
TPIP  
NC  
Pin Signal  
Description  
1
2
3
4
GND  
GND  
Y
Analog Ground  
Analog Ground  
Brightness Signal  
Chrominance Signal  
NC  
C
TPIN  
NC  
Receive–  
CAMERA UNIT connector  
NC  
8
1
15  
9
ISDN UNIT connector  
D-sub 15-pin connector (female)  
2
14  
Pin Signal  
Description  
1
13  
1
2
3
4
Y
Brightness signal  
Brightness signal ground  
Chrominance signal  
14-pin connector  
Pin Signal  
Y.GND  
C
Description  
Ground  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND  
19.5V  
DCLK+  
DCLK–  
DR+  
C.GND  
Chrominance signal  
ground  
19.5V  
5
6
7
8
9
Video  
Video signal  
Clock+  
Video.GND Video signal Ground  
Clock–  
TXD  
Transmit data  
Receive data  
Receive data+  
Receive data–  
Frame sync+  
Frame sync–  
Transmit data+  
Transmit data–  
Serial receive data  
Serial transmit data  
19.5V  
RXD  
19.5 V  
DR–  
19.5 V  
FS+  
10 MIC+  
11 MIC–  
12 SIRCS  
13 DTR  
Microphone+  
Microphone–  
Remote control data  
Data terminal ready  
FS–  
DX+  
10 DX–  
11 RX  
14 STANDBY Standby  
15 GND Ground  
12 TX  
13 19.5V  
Specifications 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pin Signal  
Description  
19.5V  
TERMINAL connector  
8
1
9
9
19.5V  
NC  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
15  
AGND  
NC  
Analog ground  
D-sub 15-pin connector (female)  
Pin Signal  
Description  
RD+  
RD–  
GND  
Transmit data+  
Transmit data–  
Ground  
1
2
3
4
Y
Brightness signal  
Brightness signal ground  
Chrominance signal  
Y.GND  
C
C.GND  
Chrominance signal  
ground  
RGB OUT connector  
5
1
6
5
6
Video  
Video signal  
10  
15  
Video.GN Video signal Ground  
D
11  
Mini D-sub 15-pin (female)  
7
8
9
RXD  
TXD  
Receive data  
Pin Signal  
Description  
R (red)  
Transmit data  
19.5 V  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RED  
19.5 V  
GREEN  
BLUE  
NC  
G (green)  
B (blue)  
10 MIC+  
11 MIC–  
12 SIRCS  
13 DTR  
Microphone+  
Microphone–  
Remote control data  
Data terminal ready  
GND  
Ground  
RED.GND  
R (red) signal ground  
14 STANDBY Standby  
GREEN.GND G (green) signal  
ground  
15 GND  
Ground  
8
BLUE.GND B (blue) signal  
ground  
DSB connector  
1
8
9
NC  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
SYNC.GND Sync signal ground  
9
15  
NC  
D-sub 15-pin (male)  
NC  
Pin Signal  
Description  
HSYNC  
VSYNC  
NC  
Horizontal sync  
Vertical sync  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Video  
Video signal  
Video.GND Video signal ground  
LINE A+  
LINE A–  
MIC+  
MIC–  
Line audio+  
Line audio–  
Microphone+  
Microphone–  
Receive+  
TD+  
TD–  
Receive–  
218 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Signal  
12 RX  
Description  
Serial receive data  
19.5V  
Pin Assignments on Optional  
Board Connectors  
13 19.5V  
14 GND  
ISDN 1-3 jacks (PCSA-B384S)  
ISDN 1-6 jacks (PCSA-B768S)  
ISDN PRI jack (PCSA-PRI)  
Ground  
TERMINAL connector (PCSA-  
DSB1S)  
1
8
1
8
Modular jack  
9
15  
Pin Signal  
Description  
D-sub 15-pin connector (male)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NC  
NC  
TA  
RA  
RB  
TB  
NC  
NC  
Pin Signal  
Description  
1
Video  
Video signal  
Transmit+  
Receive+  
Receive–  
Transmit–  
2
Video.GND Video signal ground  
3
LINE A+  
LINE A–  
MIC+  
MIC–  
RD+  
Line audio+  
Line audio–  
Microphone+  
Microphone–  
Receive+  
Receive–  
19.5V  
4
5
6
7
8
RD–  
TERMINAL connector (PCSA-  
B384S/PCSA-B768S/PCSA-PRI)  
9
19.5V  
NC  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
2
14  
AGND  
NC  
Analog ground  
1
13  
TD+  
Transmit data+  
Transmit data–  
Ground  
USB connector  
TD–  
Pin Signal  
Description  
Chassis ground  
19.5V  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND  
19.5V  
DCLK+  
DCLK–  
DR+  
Clock+  
Clock–  
Transmit data+  
Transmit data–  
Frame sync+  
Frame sync–  
Receive data+  
Receive data–  
Serial transmit data  
DR–  
FS+  
FS–  
DX+  
10 DX–  
11 TX  
Specifications 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Signal  
Port number  
List of Port Numbers Used on  
the PCS-PG70/PG70P  
RAS (PCS-G70/  
G70P)  
Any number from 3000  
to 3002 (using  
GateKeeper)  
When connecting one-to-one  
(Default)  
When “Port Number Used” is set to  
“Default” in the LAN Setup menu, the PCS-  
G70/G70P uses the following port numbers.  
(MCU option not installed)  
RAS  
(GateKeeper)  
1718 or 1719 (using  
GateKeeper)  
Q.931 (dial)  
Any number from 3000  
to 3002  
Q.931 (answer)  
H.245  
1720  
Signal  
Port number  
Any number from 3000  
to 3002  
RAS (PCS-G70/  
G70P)  
Any number from 2253  
to 2255 (using  
Audio RTP  
Audio RTCP  
Video RTP  
Video RTCP  
FECC RTP  
FECC RTCP  
3100  
3101  
3102  
3103  
3104  
3105  
GateKeeper)  
RAS  
(GateKeeper)  
1718 or 1719 (using  
GateKeeper)  
Q.931 (dial)  
Any number from 2253  
to 2255  
Q.931 (answer)  
H.245  
1720  
Any number from 2253  
to 2255  
Data conference/ 3106  
dual video RTP  
Audio RTP  
Audio RTCP  
Video RTP  
Video RTCP  
FECC RTP  
FECC RTCP  
49152  
49153  
49154  
49155  
49156  
49157  
Data conference/ 3107  
dual video RTCP  
Using as the main terminal of a  
multipoint videoconference  
(Default)  
When “Port Number Used” is set to  
“Default” in NAT/Port of the LAN Setup  
menu, the PCS-PG70/PG70P operated as the  
main terminal uses the following port  
numbers.  
Data conference/ 49158  
dual video RTP  
Data conference/ 49159  
dual video RTCP  
Signal  
Port number Portnumber  
(First point) (N point)  
th  
When connecting one-to-one  
(Custom: TCP Port Number 3000  
and UDP Port Number 3000)  
RAS (PCS-  
PG70/PG70P)  
Any number from 2253 to  
2263 (using Gate  
Keeper)  
When “Port Number Used” is set to  
“Custom” in NAT/Port of the LAN Setup  
menu, the PCS-PG70/PG70P uses the port  
numbers defined by the values entered in  
“TCP Port Number” and “UDP Port  
Number”.  
For example, when “TCP Port Number” is  
set to “3000” and “UDP Port Number” is set  
to “3100”, the PCS-PG70/PG70P uses the  
following port numbers.  
RAS (Gate  
Keeper)  
1718 or 1719 (using Gate  
Keeper)  
Q.931 (dial)  
Any number from 2253 to  
2263  
Q.931 (answer) 1720  
H.245 Any number from 2253 to  
2263  
220 Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Signal  
Port number Portnumber  
Signal  
Port  
Port number  
th  
th  
(First point) (N point)  
number  
(First point)  
(N point)  
Audio RTP  
Audio RTCP  
Video RTP  
Video RTCP  
FECC RTP  
FECC RTCP  
49152  
49153  
49154  
49155  
49156  
49157  
49158  
49152+20 ×  
(N-1)  
Q.931 (answer) 1720  
49153+20 ×  
(N-1)  
H.245  
Any number from 3000 to  
3010  
49154+20 ×  
(N-1)  
Audio RTP  
Audio RTCP  
Video RTP  
Video RTCP  
FECC RTP  
FECC RTCP  
3100  
3101  
3102  
3103  
3104  
3105  
3106  
3100+20 ×  
(N-1)  
49155+20 ×  
(N-1)  
3101+20 ×  
(N-1)  
49156+20 ×  
(N-1)  
3102+20 ×  
(N-1)  
49157+20 ×  
(N-1)  
3103+20 ×  
(N-1)  
Data  
conference/dual  
video RTP  
49158+20 ×  
(N-1)  
3104+20 ×  
(N-1)  
3105+20 ×  
(N-1)  
Data  
conference/dual  
video RTCP  
49159  
49159+20 ×  
(N-1)  
Data  
conference/dual  
3106+20 ×  
(N-1)  
video RTP  
Using as the main terminal of a  
multipoint videoconference  
(Custom: TCP Port Number 3000  
and UDP Port Number 3000)  
Data  
conference/dual  
video RTCP  
3107  
3107+20 ×  
(N-1)  
When “Port Number Used” is set to  
“Custom” in NAT/Port of the LAN Setup  
menu, the PCS-PG70/PG70P uses the port  
numbers defined by the values entered in  
“TCP Port Number” and “UDP Port  
Number”.  
For example, when “TCP Port Number” is  
set to “3000” and “UDP Port Number” is set  
to “3100”, the PCS-PG70/PG70P operated  
as the main terminal uses the following port  
numbers.  
Signal  
Port  
number  
(First point)  
Port number  
th  
(N point)  
RAS (PCS-  
PG70/PG70P)  
Any number from 3000 to  
3010 (using Gate  
Keeper)  
RAS  
(GateKeeper)  
1718 or 1719 (using Gate  
Keeper)  
Q.931 (dial)  
Any number from 3000 to  
3010  
Specifications 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Side view (vertical range at  
maximum zoom-out)  
Videoconferencing  
Room Layout  
Be sure to position camera and microphone  
appropriately in your videoconferencing  
room.  
25˚  
Camera Range  
3.1 m  
(8.41 ft)  
42˚  
25˚  
represents the shooting area of the  
camera when the zoom has been extended  
fully.  
indicates the shooting area of  
the camera when the left/right angling  
function is fully utilized. Use the  
measurements below as a guide for the  
layout of your videoconference room.  
4 m (13.12 ft)  
Layout Considerations  
Top view (horizontal range at  
maximum zoom-out)  
• Avoid having large, moving objects,  
especially people, behind the participants,  
as the quality of the picture transmitted to  
the remote party will deteriorate.  
• Do not seat participants in front of a wall  
with fine stripe patterns.  
• Choose a room where echo will not occur.  
• Do not install the system near noise  
sources such as air conditioners or copy  
machines.  
100˚  
100˚  
• Avoid placing the system in a room where  
there are the speakers used for an in-house  
broadcasting system.  
4 m  
(13.12 ft)  
65˚  
Lighting Considerations  
5.1 m (16.73 ft)  
Do not point the camera toward a window  
where sunlight comes in as back lighting  
may decrease the contrast. If it is necessary,  
cover the window with a thick curtain.  
222 Videoconferencing Room Layout  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjust room lighting so that it falls on the  
participants. Avoid direct light on the TV  
monitor. Light intensity on faces should be  
about 300 lux or more.  
If an inverter type or brightness-adjustable  
type of fluorescent lamp is used, the  
sensitivity of the Remote Commander may  
deteriorate.  
Videoconferencing Room Layout 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
An abbreviation for Dynamic Host  
Configuration Protocol. Manages IP  
addresses in the network.  
Glossary  
DNS  
Bonding*  
An abbreviation for Domain Name System.  
Defines the domain name system.  
Bonding is one of the Inverse Multiplexing  
methods allowing the connection of the  
videoconferencing system with multiple  
ISDN lines. Dialing the first ISDN line  
enables you to connect all other lines.  
Dialing the second and later lines is done  
automatically by the communication  
between the videoconferencing systems on  
both sites. To use bonding, it is required that  
both videoconferencing systems be  
equipped with the bonding function and that  
“Area Code” and “Local Number” in the  
ISDN Setup menu of the answering site be  
set correctly. As the communication  
between the systems when using the  
bonding function is made via the ISDN  
numbers of the answering site, the “Area  
Code” and “Local Number” settings in the  
ISDN Setup menu are not essential at the  
dialing site.  
Echo Canceler  
Device to eliminate echo that occurs when  
transmitting audio.  
Frame rate  
The number of frames which can be  
encoded/decoded in one second.  
* Bonding (Bandwidth on Demand  
Interoperability Group) is a registered  
trademark of THE BONDING  
CONSORTIUM.  
BRI  
An abbreviation for Basic Rate Interface.  
Basic interface standardized by the ITU-T.  
Single ISDN has two B channels and one D  
channel.  
CIF  
An abbreviation for Common Intermediate  
Format. This format allows communication  
between different color systems (NTSC and  
PAL).  
352 pixels × 288 lines  
Codec  
An abbreviation for Coder-Decoder. An  
integrated device of a coder that converts an  
analog audio/video signal to a digital data  
stream and compresses it, and a decoder for  
expanding to restore the original analog  
signal.  
DHCP  
224 Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
G.711  
H.239  
Audio encoding/decoding format  
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone  
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a  
digital signal with a data rate of 64 Kbps. It  
can be transmitted with a data rate of 56  
Kbps.  
ITU-T standard for sharing data and  
presentations with video. This supports the  
dual video presentation mode, enabling  
endpoints to receive and transmit video and  
presentation data simultaneously.  
H.261  
G.722  
Video codec for audio/visual services as p ×  
64 Kbps. Videoconferencing standard that  
defines a video coding algorithm, picture  
format and error correcting technology for  
communication between different  
Audio encoding/decoding format  
recommended by the ITU-T. A 7-kHz  
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a  
digital signal with a data rate of 48 Kbps, 56  
Kbps or 64 Kbps.  
manufacturers’ video codecs.  
G.722.1  
H.263  
Audio encoding/decoding format  
recommended by the ITU-T. A 7-kHz  
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a  
digital signal with a data rate of 24Kbps or  
32 Kbps.  
A video coding algorithm based on the  
H.261 standard. This format enables  
communication via a lower bit rate.  
H.263+  
Video encoding/decoding format based on  
the H.263 standard, added by the Annex I to  
T (I, J, K …… T), that allows enhanced  
picture quality and error resistance.  
Normally, this format is a profile used with  
a combination of some of the Annex for  
H.263/H.263+.  
G.723.1  
Audio encoding/decoding format  
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone  
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a  
digital signal with a data rate of 5.3 Kbps or  
6.3 Kbps.  
G.728  
H.264  
Audio encoding/decoding format  
A video coding algorithm newly  
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone  
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a  
digital signal with a data rate of 16 Kbps.  
standardized by the ITU-T in May 2003.  
This format realizes high-quality picture via  
a lower bit rate. It provides an equal picture  
quality via half as low bit rate as the H.263  
format. The H.264 format is also called as  
MPEG4 Advanced Video Coding (AVC).  
G.729  
Audio encoding/decoding format  
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone  
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a  
digital signal with the data rate of 8 Kbps.  
H.320  
A videoconferencing standard for  
communication between different  
videoconferencing system.  
Gatekeeper  
Controls the access of H.323  
videoconference devices on a network.  
Administers the zone, access limitation,  
audio/video bandwidth, and alias etc.  
H.323  
This enables communications on the non-  
QOS (Quality of Service) LAN.  
H.221  
HMLP  
Frame structure for a 64 to 1920 Kbps  
channel in audiovisual teleservices.  
See “MLP”.  
Glossary 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I-MUX  
MLP  
An abbreviation for Inverse Multiplexer.  
This protocol allows you to transmit the data  
at 384 Kbps via 6B-channel.  
Data communication is also available during  
communication of video/audio signals  
between the videoconferencing systems.  
The MLP or HMLP is a protocol for data  
communication such as NetMeeting. Using  
the HMLP protocol allows faster data  
transmission.  
Interlaced SIF  
With TV pictures, 60 fields of pictures per  
second are interlaced to provide high  
resolution and smooth motion pictures.  
The conventional videoconferencing system  
uses CIF format pictures (352 pixel × 388  
line) transmitted in 30 fields per second. In  
CIF format, smooth motion pictures like TV  
pictures cannot be obtained. In the Interlaced  
SIF format, interlaced SIF size pictures (352  
pixel × 240 line) can be transmitted at 60  
frames per second. This enables display of  
pictures with higher vertical resolution of  
352 pixel × 480 lines, providing smooth  
motion picture. However, a relatively higher  
bit rate is required as the amount of  
MPEG4  
A video coding algorithm recommended by  
the ISO/IEC based on the H.263+ standard.  
Adding some tools provides some  
improvement of picture quality compared  
with the H.263+ standard. The MPEG4  
format is commonly used for personal  
computers, cellular phones, etc.  
P in P  
An abbreviation for “Picture in Picture.”  
This is a function which allows you to  
monitor your own party on a small window  
on your TV monitor.  
information is twice as much as that of the  
CIF format.  
QCIF  
ISDN  
An abbreviation for Quater CIF. The number  
of pixels is a quarter than one of CIF format.  
176 pixels × 144 lines  
An abbreviation for Integrated Services  
Digital Network. This is a communication  
protocol by CCITT on transmission of  
integrated voice, video, and data.  
Bandwidths include basic (64 Kbps) and  
primary rate (1.544 and 2.048 Mbps).  
Secondary terminal  
Normally, a multipoint videoconference is  
not available unless the video and audio  
modes and transmission rate of the  
ITU-T  
videoconferencing systems of all the sites  
are the same. For a multipoint  
videoconference the terminal that can be  
connected in the same modes is called a  
primary terminal, while a secondary  
An abbreviation for International  
Telecommunication Union,  
Telecommunications.  
*1  
Lip synchronization  
A function that synchronizes sound with  
motion. Sound processing is much faster  
than motion processing, thus sound and  
motion sometimes get out of step with each  
other.  
terminal is the terminal in which some of the  
functions are restricted since the connection  
is not enabled with the same modes. The  
restriction on the functions depends on the  
conditions described in “Notes on  
Secondary Terminals” under “in chapter 8  
Multipoint Videoconference”.  
MCU  
An abbreviation for Multipoint Control  
Unit. When connecting a MCU, a multipoint  
videoconference can be held.  
For example, this system does not transmit  
video signals to a terminal that has no  
common formats but can communicate via  
audio signals. In this case, the terminal in  
which picture viewing is not available is  
*2  
regarded as a secondary terminal.  
A
terminal communicated via a normal phone  
included in the multipoint videoconference  
226 Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
is also called a secondary terminal. For  
details on secondary terminals, see “Notes  
on Secondary Terminals” on page 187.  
*1 Difference between the NTSC and PAL  
color systems is permitted.  
*2 Receiving the video signals from this  
terminal may be available with the system.  
SNMP  
An abbreviation for Simple Network  
Management Protocol. This protocol is for  
management information between the  
management station and the managed  
terminals.  
SPID  
An abbreviation for Service Profile ID.  
Sub-address  
An identification number given to devices  
sharing a common ISDN line.  
TOS  
Inputting the information data in the TOS  
field of the IP address allows the  
communication system to judge the packet  
transmission priority, etc. It also enables  
change of path according to the types of  
service (Delay or Size).  
Glossary 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Configuration  
The menus of the camera are configured as described below.  
For detailed information, see pages in parentheses. The initial settings of each  
item are bolded.  
Phone Book List Edit  
Launcher  
Index  
IP  
A
(page 75)  
(page 68)  
Line I/F  
IP, ISDN, ISDN (Telephone),  
multipoint  
Number of Lines  
LAN Bandwidth  
Auto Dial  
On, Off  
Detail Dial  
Dial  
IP  
A
(page 78)  
Line I/F  
IP, ISDN, ISDN(2B), ISDN (Telephone),  
multipoint  
LAN Bandwidth  
History  
Menu  
Still Image  
(page 111)  
Receive, Clear  
Information  
Continuous Send, Stop  
Save  
Send Object  
Camera  
(page 92)  
Preset Save  
Preset Load  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
Angle, Zoom, Focus,  
Brightness, Backlight  
(page 108)  
Memory Stick  
Setup  
(page 43)  
Dial Setup  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Answer Setup  
Communication Setup  
Status  
Audio Setup  
Video Setup  
General Setup  
Administrator Setup  
LAN Setup  
ISDN Setup  
Information  
228 Menu Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ADial Setup  
Page: 1/2  
Page: 2/2  
Line I/F  
Bonding  
Telephone Mode  
More Options Enable  
User Name Input  
Prefix  
IP ISDN, ISDN (Telephone)  
Auto, On  
Auto, G.711µ-law, G.711A-law  
On, Off  
(page 44)  
On, Off  
Prefix-None, Prefix-A,  
Prefix-B, Prefix-C  
Number input  
Prefix-A  
Prefix-B  
Number input  
Prefix-C  
Number input  
Select LAN Prefix  
LAN Prefix  
Enable, Disable  
Number input  
BAnswer Setup Page: 1/1  
(page 46)  
Auto Answer  
ISDN MSN  
Auto Answer, Off  
On, Off  
Mic on Answer  
Reject Answer  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Menu Configuration 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CCommunication Setup  
(page 46)  
Page: 1/4  
Page: 2/4  
Individual Settings  
Number of Lines  
LAN bandwidth  
Video Mode  
On, Off  
Auto, H.264, MPEG4,  
H.263+, H.261  
On, Off  
Interlace Mode  
4CIF Mode  
On, Off  
Video Frame  
Audio Mode  
Auto, 15fps, 30fps  
Auto, MPEG4 Audio,  
G.722.1, G.722,  
G.729, G.728, G.723.1,  
G.711  
Restrict  
Auto, 56K  
Page: 3/4  
Page: 4/4  
Far End Camera Control  
T.120 Data  
H.239  
Multipoint Mode  
Broadcast Mode  
Split  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Auto, On  
Split, Voice Activate  
Automatic,  
Six-screen Mosaic  
Full Screen,  
Sender Screen  
Automatic, Six-screen Mosaic  
230 Menu Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DStatus  
(page 49)  
Communication Status  
Connection A*  
(Encode/  
Decode)  
Audio Mode  
Video Mode  
Frame Rate  
LSD Rate  
MLP Rate  
HMLP Rate  
Camera Control  
Data Control  
Line I/F  
Rate  
DSB  
Whiteboard  
Connection E*  
(Encode/  
(Decode)  
Audio Mode  
Video Mode  
Frame Rate  
LSD Rate  
MLP Rate  
HMLP Rate  
Camera Control  
Data Control  
Line I/F  
Rate  
DSB  
Whiteboard  
ISDN Line Status  
Status**  
Cause Code  
Status**  
LAN Line Status  
Cause Code  
LAN Connection Status  
Send  
/Receive  
Audio Bit Rate  
Video Bit Rate  
Receive Packet Loss  
Audio Data  
Video Data  
Camera Control Data  
Packet Recover Ratio  
*
During a multipoint videoconference Connection A to E with the  
terminal name appear according to the points connected.  
** While not in communication only these items are displayed.  
Menu Configuration 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EAudio Setup  
(page 50)  
Page: 1/2  
Page: 2/2  
Input Select  
Mic Select  
CTE  
Echo Canceler  
Lip Sync  
Recording Mute  
Beep Sound  
Sound Effect  
Dial Tone  
MIC, AUX, MIC + AUX  
MIC, DSB MIC, LINE  
Off, LINE, DSB AUX IN  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Ringer Tone  
On, Off  
FVideo Setup  
(page 52)  
Video Input  
Dual Video  
Split  
MAIN  
On, Off  
Off, Horizontal, Vertical  
CAMERA, IR1, AUX1  
CAMERA, IR2, AUX2  
SUB  
Custom  
Input Label  
Main Camera  
IR1  
AUX1  
Sub camera  
IR2  
AUX2  
Monitor Out  
Monitors  
Connection  
1, 2, 3  
VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,  
RGB OUT, RGB OUT (DSB)  
MAIN, SUB  
Monitor  
232 Menu Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G General Setup  
(page 53)  
Device Setup  
Page: 1/2  
Clock Set  
Terminal Name  
Standby Mode  
Standby Time  
On, Off  
1–99 minutes  
Last Number Registration On, Off  
Control by Far End  
Language  
On, Off  
Device Setup  
Page: 2/2  
English, French, German, Japanese,  
Spanish, Italian, Simplified Chinese,  
Portuguese  
IR Repeater Mode  
MODE1, MODE2, MODE3,  
MODE4  
T.120 PC Address  
Time Display  
Menu Screens  
Page: 1/3  
On, Off  
Display Terminal Name  
Character Input Help  
Phone Book Button  
Detail Dial Button  
Menu Button  
Off, Show temporarily, Always show  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Menu Screens  
Page: 2/3  
Information Button  
History Button  
Menu Screens  
Page: 3/3  
Direct Phone Book Button On, Off  
Direct Dial Text Box  
Guide  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Whiteboard  
Page: 1/1  
Whiteboard Attachment  
Whiteboard Size  
Vertical, Horizontal  
2'0"×3'0", 3'0"×4'0", 4'0"×6'0", 4'0"×8'0"  
3'0"×2'0",4'0"×3'0", 6'0"×4'0", 8'0"×4'0"  
Inches, Meters  
Whiteboard Size  
Measurement  
H Administrator Setup  
Password  
Page: 1/3  
Administrator Password  
Phone Book Modification Password  
Save Settings Password  
(page 56)  
Remote Access Password  
Password  
Page: 2/3  
Dial Setup  
Answer Setup  
Transmission Mode  
Audio Setup  
Video Setup  
General Setup  
LAN Setup  
ISDN Setup  
Save Phone Book  
Load Phone Book  
Clear Phone Book  
Auto Dialing  
Enable, Disable  
Enable, Disable  
Enable, Disable  
Enable, Disable  
Enable, Disable  
Enable, Disable  
Enable, Disable  
Enable, Disable  
Password  
Page: 3/3  
Phone Book  
Page: 1/1  
Private  
On, Off  
Phone Book  
Page: 1/1  
Create Private Phone Book  
Delete Private Phone Book  
Copy to Private Phone Book  
Web Monitor On, Off  
Other Settings  
Page: 1/1  
Menu Configuration 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I LAN Setup  
(page 59)  
General Setup  
Page: 1/2  
DHCP Mode  
Host Name  
IP Address  
Auto, Off  
Network Mask  
Gateway Address  
DNS Address  
LAN Mode  
General Setup  
Page: 2/2  
Auto Negotiation,100Mbps Full Duplex,  
100Mbps Half Duplex, 10Mbps Full Duplex,  
10Mbps Half Duplex  
Gatekeeper  
Mode  
Page: 1/1  
Gatekeeper Mode  
Gatekeeper Address  
User Alias  
Auto, On, Off  
User Number  
SNMP Setup  
Page: 1/1  
SNMP Mode  
Trap Destination  
Community  
Description  
Location  
On, Off  
Contact  
PPPoE  
PPPoE  
On, Off  
Page: 1/2  
PPPoE User Name  
PPPoE Password  
Fixed IP for PPPoE  
Fixed IP Address for PPPoE  
PPPoE DNS  
PPPoE  
Page: 2/2  
On, Off  
Specify, Obtain automatically  
Primary DNS  
Secondary DNS  
NAT/Port Setup  
Page: 1/1  
NAT Mode  
On, Off  
NAT Address  
Port Number Used  
TCP Port Number  
UDP Port Number  
Custom, Default  
QoS Setup  
Page: 1/1  
Hybrid  
On, Off  
Forward Error Correction On, Off  
Packet Resend Request  
Adaptive Rate Control  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Type of Service  
Setup  
Page: 1/1  
TOS  
Off, IP Precedence, Diffserve  
IP Precedence  
Low Delay  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
On, Off  
High Throughput  
High Reliability  
Minimum Cost  
Diffserve  
Encryption via  
LAN Setup  
Page: 1/1  
Encryption via LAN  
Encryption Password  
On, Off  
J ISDN Setup  
(page 64)  
Page: 1/6  
Page: 2/6  
Country/Region  
Protocol  
Area Code  
Local Number  
Page: 3/6  
Page: 4/6  
Page: 5/6  
Page: 6/6  
Sub Address  
SPID  
SPID A1-C2*  
SPID D1-F2*  
* Displayed only when “USA” is selected in “Country/Region”.  
234 Menu Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K Information  
Page: 1/1  
Host Version  
ISDN UNIT Version  
DSB Version  
(page 67)  
DSP Version  
Software Option  
None, Multipoint (H.323),  
Multipoint (H.320),  
Multipoint (H.320 + H.323)  
None, ISDN UNIT (B768), DSB,  
Whiteboard, ISDN UNIT (B384),  
ISDN UNIT (PRI)  
Option I/F  
Host Name  
IP Address  
MAC Address  
Serial Number  
Menu Configuration 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Air Conditioner CV P10LJ User Manual
Sony Computer Drive NW HD3 User Manual
Sony Digital Camera W55 User Manual
Sony Personal Computer LIB D81 User Manual
Sony Portable CD Player MZ R501DPC User Manual
Sony Portable Speaker SRS PC21L User Manual
Sony Projection Television KFO42WE610 User Manual
Standard Horizon Marine Radio GX3000S User Manual
StarTechcom Network Card PCI4S9503V User Manual
Sterling Plumbing Indoor Furnishings 14619 3 User Manual